Yamaha HTR-5450 Manual de usuario

Categoría
Receptor
Tipo
Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia ID V723100-1
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
HTR-5450
HTR-5440
Natural Sound AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
U C A
00HTR5450/5440-cv 3/29/1, 11:27 AM1
CAUTION
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the unit is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating
instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions
should be followed.
5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water
– for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry
tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc.
6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or
stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
6A A unit and cart combination should be moved
with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart
combination to overturn.
7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should
be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or
position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For
example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or
similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or
placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet
that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation
openings.
9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources
such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat.
10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply
only of the type described in the operating instructions or as
marked on the unit.
11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed
so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items
placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to
cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where
they exit from the unit.
12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended
by the manufacturer.
13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be
unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period
of time.
14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects
do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the
unit.
15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by
qualified service personnel when:
A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the
unit; or
C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or
D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits
a marked change in performance; or
E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.
16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit
beyond those means described in the operating instructions.
All other servicing should be referred to qualified service
personnel.
17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away
from power lines.
18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so
that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION
I CAUTION
0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM2
CAUTION
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.
Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,
Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of
assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to
the operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which can
be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please
try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following
measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute
this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate
retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A.
6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by
playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud
and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
19 For US customers only:
Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is
connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and
built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical
Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to
proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure,
grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit,
size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge
unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for
the grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 81020)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 81021)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged
exposure from excessive volume levels.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines
for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable
ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the
building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION II
0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM3
CAUTION
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for
ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock,
do not place this unit where it may get exposed to
rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit
in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with
a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit,
which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to
this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 On the top of this unit, do not place:
Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause
electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this
unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is
dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held
responsible for any damage resulting from use of this
unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical
storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/
or liquid drops inside this unit.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of
time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models
only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE
plugging into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source
as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this
unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby
mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a
very small quantity of power.
FREQUENCY STEP switch
(China and General models only)
Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in
different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch
(locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing
in your area.
North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz
Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug
of this unit from the AC outlet.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owners Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
III CAUTION
0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM4
11
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FEATURES .......................................................... 2
GETTING STARTED ......................................... 3
Checking the Package Contents ............................. 3
Battery Installation in the Remote Control ............ 3
Battery Replacement .............................................. 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................... 4
Front Panel ............................................................. 4
Remote Control ...................................................... 6
Using the Remote Control ...................................... 7
Display ................................................................... 8
Rear Panel .............................................................. 9
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................ 10
Speakers to Be Used ............................................ 10
Speaker Placement ............................................... 10
CONNECTIONS ............................................... 11
Before Connecting Components ........................... 11
Connecting Audio Components ........................... 12
Connecting an External Decoder ......................... 12
Connecting Video Components ............................ 14
Connecting Speakers ............................................ 16
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ..................... 18
Connecting the Power Supply Cords ................... 18
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE .... 19
Before You Start Adjusting .................................. 19
Using the Test Tone .............................................. 19
BASIC OPERATION
PLAYING A SOURCE ...................................... 21
Input Modes and Indications ................................ 23
Selecting a DSP Program ..................................... 24
Canceling the Sound Effect
(turning off the effect speakers) ....................... 25
TUNING ............................................................. 26
Connecting the Antennas ..................................... 26
Automatic Tuning ................................................ 27
Manual Tuning ..................................................... 27
Automatic Preset Tuning
(for FM stations only) ...................................... 28
Manual Preset Tuning .......................................... 29
To Recall a Preset Station .................................... 29
Exchanging Preset Stations .................................. 30
RECORDING A SOURCE ............................... 31
ADVANCED OPERATION
SET MENU ......................................................... 32
Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .............. 32
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .......... 33
2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ...... 34
3 I/O ASSIGN ...................................................... 34
4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................. 35
5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................. 35
6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ............................... 36
7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) ............................ 36
8 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 36
9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ...................... 36
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS .......................................................... 37
Delay Time ........................................................... 37
Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear
and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer .......... 37
Adjusting Method ................................................ 38
SLEEP TIMER .................................................. 39
Setting the SLEEP Timer ..................................... 39
Canceling the SLEEP Timer ................................ 39
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ...................... 40
Component Selector Buttons ............................... 40
Controlling the Components Connected to
This Unit .......................................................... 40
Description of Each Mode ................................... 41
Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................ 45
Returning to the Factory Setting .......................... 46
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................ 47
Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................ 47
CINEMA DSP Programs ...................................... 47
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 50
SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5450) ...................... 54
SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5440) ...................... 55
GLOSSARY ....................................................... 56
INDEX ................................................................ 58
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM1
2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, AC-3, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories,
Inc. All rights reserved.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US
Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and
pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater
Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This document is the Owners Manual for both the HTR-5450 and HTR-5440. For details on various functions unique
to each model, see the descriptions given for each model name. Illustrations for the HTR-5450 are used for common
functions.
y indicates a tip for your operation.
Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when
the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in
parentheses in this manual.
FEATURES
5-Channel Power Amplification
Minimum RMS Output
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz 20 kHz)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Main: 80 W + 80 W (8 )
Center: 80 W (8 )
Rear: 80 W + 80 W (8 )
[Australia, Singapore, China and General models]
Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 )
Center: 70 W (8 )
Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 )
Main: 65 W + 65 W (8 )
Center: 65 W (8 )
Rear: 65 W + 65 W (8 )
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
(10% THD, 1 kHz)
[China and General models]
Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 )
Center: 100 W (8 )
Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 )
[China and General models]
Main: 95 W + 95 W (8 )
Center: 95 W (8 )
Rear: 95 W + 95 W (8 )
HTR-5450
HTR-5440
HTR-5450
HTR-5440
Multi-mode Digital Sound Field
Processing
DTS Decoder
Dolby Pro Logic Decoder
Dolby Digital Decoder
Hi-Fi DSP
CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or
DTS
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner
40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning
Automatic Preset Tuning
Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing)
Other Features
96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter
SET MENU which Provides You with 9 Items
for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video
System
Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance
Adjustment
6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future
Formats
Video Signal Input and Output Capability
(Including S Video Connections
)
Optical and Coaxial Digital Signal Input Jacks
SLEEP Timer
Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5450 only
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM2
3
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
GETTING STARTED
Checking the Package Contents
Check that the following items are included in your package.
2
1
3
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) AM loop antenna
Battery Installation in the Remote
Control
1 Turn the remote control over and slide the
battery compartment cover in the direction of
the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type)
according to the polarity markings on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3 Close the battery compartment cover.
Battery Replacement
If the remote control operates only when it is close to the
unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with
new ones.
Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes.
If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for
the remote control will return to the factory settings.
Notes
Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement.
Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside
the battery compartment.)
Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an
extended period of time.
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
Quick reference card
Connection guide
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China and
General models)
(Australia and
Singapore models)
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM3
4
SURROUND
DIGITAL
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
1
2
3
5
6
7 8
9
0
q
oi
y
pu a
e
t
r
w
4
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set
this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on,
set the volume at the minimum level.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of
power to receive infrared-signals from the remote
control.
SURROUND
DIGITAL
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
1
2
3
5
6
7 8
9
0
q
oi
y
pu a
e
t
r
w
4
HTR-5450
HTR-5440
2 Remote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control.
3 Display
This shows various information.
4 INPUT MODE
Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO,
DTS and ANALOG for the sources that send two or more
types of signals to this unit.
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM4
5
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
5 VOLUME
Turn this control to turn up or down the volume.
6 6CH INPUT
Press this button to select the source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT
takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h
(or the input selector buttons on the remote control).
7 BASS
Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the low-frequency response.
8 TREBLE
Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the high-frequency response.
Note
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the
center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right
main speakers.
9 BALANCE
This control is only effective for the sound from the main
speakers.
Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume
from the right and left main speakers to compensate for
sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening
room conditions.
0 SPEAKERS A/B
Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main
speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use.
Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker
system that you dont want to use.
q PROGRAM l / h
Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect
speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the
selected program appears on the display.
w EFFECT
Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center
and rear). If you turn them off, all Dolby Digital and DTS
audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the
right and left main speakers. In that case, the output levels
of the right and left speakers may not match.
e PHONES jack
Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack so that this
unit outputs audio signals for private listening.
When listening with headphones privately, set both
SPEAKERS A/B to the OFF position.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
r VIDEO AUX jacks
Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a
game console or camcorder to these jacks. To reproduce
source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
t PRESET/TUNING l / h
When z appears on the display:
This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8).
Press l to select a lower and h to select a higher preset
station number.
When z goes off from the display:
This button is used for tuning. Press l to tune in to lower
frequencies, and h to tune in to higher frequencies.
y A/B/C/D/E
Press this button to select one of 5 preset station groups (A
to E).
u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Press this button to turn on or off z on the display and
switch the function between for storing a broadcasting
station (preset tuning) and for tuning. This button is also
used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with
each other.
i MEMORY (MANL/AUTO FM)
Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. Hold
down this button for more than 3 seconds to begin
automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only).
o TUNING MODE (AUTO/MANL MONO)
Press this button to switch the tuning mode between
automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method,
press this button so that the AUTO indicator lights up on
the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this
button so that the AUTO indicator goes off.
p FM/AM
Press this button to switch the reception band between FM
and AM.
a INPUT l / h
Press these buttons to select the input source (DVD, AUX,
MD/CD-R, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL) that
you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected
input source appears on the display.
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM5
6
Remote Control
1 Indicator
This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote
control. If it flashes rapidly several times, press the selected
button again.
2 Component selector buttons
Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the
component you want to control with the remote control.
(The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to
Setting the Manufacturer Code.) When the component
selector button has been pressed, the remote control is set to
that component operation mode.
3 POWER
Each time you press this button, the unit switches between
the power on and standby mode.
4 TEST
Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker.
5 A/B/C/D/E, PRESET /+
These buttons are used to select a preset station.
A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset
stations
PRESET /+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8)
6 MUTE
Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press
this button again.
7 VOLUME
These buttons are used to adjust the volume level.
u: To turn up the volume
d: To turn down the volume
8 SLEEP
Press this button to set the SLEEP timer.
9 /+
These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and
TIME/LEVEL mode.
0 TIME/LEVEL
Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL
mode.
q Input selector buttons
These buttons select the input source.
CD: To play a CD
TUNER: To listen to an FM or AM broadcast
MD/CD-R: To play an MD or CD recorder (or tape
deck)
DVD: To play a DVD
D-TV/CBL: To watch a TV/digital TV or cable TV
VCR: To play a video cassette
AUX: To use another audio component
V-AUX: To use another audio/video component
w 6CH INPUT
Press this button to play a source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
1
2
3
q
e
w
r
t
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
TV VOLUME
TV INPUT
Press
AMP(TUNER).
This section describes basic operation of this unit with the
remote control. First, press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector. Refer to PRESET REMOTE
CONTROL for full details.
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM6
7
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Using the Remote Control
Remote control
sensor
Within approximately 6 m
(20 feet)
e EFFECT
Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center
and rear).
r PRG+, PRG
Press these buttons to select a DSP program.
Once you press SET MENU, these buttons are used for
selecting the SET MENU item.
t SET MENU
Press this button to select the items in the SET MENU.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be
sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor
during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a
large object between the remote control and the sensor, the
sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to
receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight
or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe
light). In this case, change the direction of the light or
reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting.
Notes
Handle the remote control with care.
Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or
bath;
dusty places; or
extremely low temperature.
(HTR-5450)
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM7
8
Display
ENHANCED
MEMORY SLEEP
PCM
DSP
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
A
SP
B
VIRTUAL
DOLBY DTS
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DISCO 5CH STEREO
MONO TV SPORTS
MOVIE THEATER 1 2
ENTERTAINMENT
GAME
CONCERT HALL
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT
BASS EXT.
AUTO
STEREO
TUNED
dB
ms
KZ
H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
q
0
e
w
1 t indicator
The t indicator lights up when the built-in DTS
decoder is turned on.
2 VIRTUAL indicator
This lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP.
3 g and o indicators
g lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital
decoder is on and the signals of the selected source are
encoded with Dolby Digital. o lights up when
the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.
4 DSP program indicators
This indicates the name of the selected DSP program.
5 AUTO indicator
This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning
mode.
6 STEREO indicator
This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient
signal strength is being received.
7 x indicator
x lights up when the built-in digital sound
field processor is on.
8 v indicator
This lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse
code modulation) digital audio signals.
9 Headphones indicator
This lights up when headphones are connected.
0 Multi-information display
This display shows various information: for example the
name of the selected input source and the various settings
during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station
frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner
is selected as the input source.
q MEMORY indicator
This flashes for about 5 seconds after pressing MEMORY.
During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the
memory.
w TUNED indicator
This lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.
e SLEEP indicator
This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM8
9
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Rear Panel
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
As this terminal is used for an
examination in the factory, do
not connect any equipment to
this terminal.
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
0
q
9
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
R
L
R
L
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
(U.S.A. model)
HTR-5450
HTR-5440
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
0 q
9
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
R
L
R
L
R
L
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
As this terminal is used for an
examination in the factory, do
not connect any equipment to
this terminal.
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
3 6CH INPUT jacks
See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.
4 Antenna input terminals
See page 26 for connection information.
5 Video component jacks
See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.
6 Speaker terminals
See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.
7 AC power cord
Connect to a power outlet.
8 AC OUTLET(S)
Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video
components (see page 18).
HTR-5450 only
(U.S.A. model)
9 Audio component jacks
See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.
0 SUBWOOFER jack
See page 17 for connection information.
q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your
speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before
you change the setting of this switch (see page 18).
China and General models only
FREQUENCY STEP switch
See page 26.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
See page 18.
0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM9
10
SPEAKER SETUP
Speakers to Be Used
This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality
with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers
and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers
(with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a
moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift
smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the
same manufacture to ensure even tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus
the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from
your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for
the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for
the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it
is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without
it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
The main speakers should be high-performance models and
have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers
do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise
sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-
performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full
range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.
Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective
not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all
channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency
effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a
source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA
Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for
natural and lively bass reproduction.
Speaker Placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
Main speaker (R)
Center speaker
Main
speaker (L)
Subwoofer
Rear speaker (L)
Rear speaker (R)
1.8 m
Main speakers
Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the
same.
Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing
slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the
floor.
Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face
of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the
monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the
monitor and centrally between the main speakers.
Note
If the center speaker is not used, the sound will be heard from the
right and left main speakers. In that case, CENTER SP in the
SET MENU is set to the NON position.
Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low
bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to
place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly
toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections.
CAUTION
Please use magnetically shielded speakers.
Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected
even when magnetically shielded speakers are used.
Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens.
PREPARATION
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM10
11
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
CONNECTIONS
Before Connecting Components
CAUTION
Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been
completed.
Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, + to + and “–” to “–”. Some
components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each
component to be connected to this unit.
When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect
it to the jacks with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc.
Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later.
The input and output jacks for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows:
Yellow video signals (composite)
White analog audio signals for the left channel
Red analog audio signals for the right channel
coaxial digital signals
After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.
V V
C C
L
R
L
R
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM11
12
CONNECTIONS
Connecting Audio Components
Connecting to digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can
use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS
bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the
input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input
jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
y
You can designate the input for each digital jack according to
your component by using 3 I/O ASSIGN in the SET MENU.
All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
When making connections between the digital signal jacks, you
should connect the components to the same-named analog audio
signal jacks of this unit, because a digital signal cannot be
recorded by a recording component connected to this unit.
All digital signal input jacks are applicable to sampling
frequencies of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.
About the dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before
you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not
discard the cap. When you are not using the
optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
Note
The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If
you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard,
this unit may not function properly.
Connecting a CD player
y
The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has
coaxial digital output jack.
When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital
jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack.
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5440 only
Connecting an MD recorder, CD
recorder or tape deck
y
When you connect your recording component to both the analog
and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the
digital signal.
Connect the analog input/output jack of your recording
component to the AUDIO jacks.
Notes
When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its
power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may
distort the sound from other components.
Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are
independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the
analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital
jack.
Connecting an External Decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and
right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an
external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the
6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and
surround channels.
Notes
When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot listen to DSP programs.
When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items
of 1 SPEAKER SET in the SET MENU is not affected (except
MAIN LVL).
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5440 only
HTR-5450 only
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM12
13
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
L
R
L R
L R
L
R
C
L
R
OO
OUTPUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
MAIN
OUTPUT
SURROUND
OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUTOUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
INPUT
L R
L
R
C
O
MD recorder or
CD recorder
CD player
External decoder
(HTR-5450/U.S.A. model)
indicates signal direction
indicates left analog cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates optical cables
indicates coaxial cables
CONNECTIONS
Audio component
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM13
14
Connecting Video Components
Audio signal jacks
Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.
Video signal jacks
Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.
S VIDEO jacks
If your video component has S (high-resolution) video
jacks, they can be connected to this units S VIDEO jacks.
Otherwise, connect the composite video jacks of your video
component to this units composite video jacks.
Notes
Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S
VIDEO connection.
If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and
composite input jacks, the signals will be directed to their
respective output jacks.
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO OUT L
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL OUT
S VIDEO OUT
O
V
L
R
S
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
S VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
S VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN
S
S
S
S
S
S VIDEO OUT
S
DVD player
Video monitor
S Video signal
Signal flow
TV/digital TV,
cable TV or
satellite tuner
VCR
Game console
or camcorder
CONNECTIONS
These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console or camcorder to this unit.
HTR-5450 only
AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO OUT L
VIDEO OUT
V
L
R
VIDEO AUX
VIDEO L AUDIO R
HTR-5450 HTR-5440
Game console
or camcorder
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM14
15
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
V
V
S VIDEO
INPUT
S
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
R
S
L
R
L
R
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO OUTPUTAUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
V
S
O
O
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
L
R
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
V
S
S
V
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
S
R
V
O
DVD player
Video monitor
TV/digital TV
or cable
TV/satellite tuner
VCR
indicates signal direction
indicates left analog cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates optical cables
indicates video cables
When using an LD player
Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack.
If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this units OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks,
connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an RF OUTPUT jack to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a
commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack.
If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog
input jack (D-TV/CBL or VCR 1). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD
player.
Note that this units remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for
the DVD/LD mode.
CONNECTIONS
(HTR-5450/U.S.A. model)
indicates S-video cables
HTR-5450 only
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM15
16
Connecting Speakers
Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), + (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no
sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural
and lack bass.
CAUTION
Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage the unit and/or speakers.
Speaker cables
1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8) of insulation
from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
CONNECTIONS
Banana plug
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative ()
2
1
3
2
1
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative ()
12
10 mm (3/8)
Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of
each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
y
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only)
Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob
and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the
corresponding terminal.
Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
y
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only)
Banana plug connections are also possible. First, open the tab and
then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the
corresponding terminal.
Main speaker terminals
One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of
the SPEAKERS A or B terminals.
Rear speaker terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
Center speaker terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM16
17
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Subwoofer connection
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack.
Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or
rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off
frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency
effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack.
Notes
Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operation
instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using
this units output level control of the effect speakers.)
Depending on the settings of 1 SPEAKER SET, LFE LEVEL
(5 DOLBY D. SET) and 6 DTS SET in the SET MENU, some
signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
Main speakers A
Right
Left
Main speakers B
Right Left
(HTR-5450/U.S.A.
model)
Center speaker Rear speakers
Right Left
Subwoofer
system
CONNECTIONS
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM17
18
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be
damaged.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not
be fully slid either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode.
Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only
when this unit is in the standby mode.
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAINS
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
SWITCHED
AC OUTLETS
Switch
position
Speaker
Impedance level
Left
Main
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 4 or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 or higher.
Center The impedance must be 6 or higher.
Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 or higher.
Right
Main
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 16 or higher.
[Canada model only]
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 or higher.
Center The impedance must be 8 or higher.
Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 or higher.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the
AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
Connecting the Power Supply Cords
After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you
will not use this unit for a long period of time.
AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and
General models ................................................. 2 OUTLETS
Australia model ................................................... 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your
audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this units STANDBY/ON (or
POWER). These outlets will supply power to any connected
component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum
power (total power consumption of components) that can be
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W (50 W for China
and General models).
(HTR-5450/General model)
IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR
(HTR-5450/U.S.A. model)
To AC outlet
SWITCHED
CONNECTIONS
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM18
19
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE
Using the Test Tone
The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should
be performed at your listening position with the remote
control.
1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
2 Press TEST.
TEST LEFT appears on the display.
3 Turn up the volume.
You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each
speaker for about two seconds in following order: left
main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right
rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes
as shown below.
Notes
If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit
in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.
If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the
setting of CENTER SP in the SET MENU.
This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level
balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using
the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is
performed, the sound output level heard at the listening
position will be the same from each speaker. This is
important for the best performance of the digital sound field
processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital
decoder and DTS decoder.
Note
Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the
PHONES jack when using the test tone.
Before You Start Adjusting
1 Set the volume at the
minimum level.
2 Turn the power on.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you use two main speaker
systems, press both A and B.
4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the
center position.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/ON
12
4
3
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ON
BASS BALANCE
+
LR
TREBLE
+
1
2,6
5
3
TEST
LEFT
TEST
RIGHT
TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR.
TEST CENTER
(HTR-5450)
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM19
20
4 Adjust BALANCE on the
front panel so that the
sound output level of the
right main speaker and the
left main speaker is the
same.
5 Press /+ repeatedly to
adjust the output level of
the speaker currently
outputting the test tone so
that it becomes almost the
same as that of the main
speakers.
While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected
speaker.
6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST.
The test tone stops.
Notes
If CENTER SP in the SET MENU is set to the NON position,
the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in
step 5. The center channel sound is automatically output from the
right and left main speakers.
For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to DELAY
TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS on page 37.
After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the
speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual
source. Refer to DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS on page 37.
y
Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust
the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME
(or VOLUME (u/d)).
If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear
speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by
setting MAIN LVL in the SET MENU to “–10 dB.
Front panel
BALANCE
LR
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE
0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM20
21
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on
the component selector.
1 Set the volume at the
minimum level.
2 Turn the power on.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you use two main speaker
systems, press both A and B.
PLAYING A SOURCE
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
1,6
2
6
3
4
7
2
7
6
4
4 Select the desired input source with INPUT
l / h (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on
the video monitor for video sources.)
The name of the selected input source appears on the
display.
To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks
Press 6CH INPUT so that 6CH INPUT appears on the
display.
Notes
An audio source can not be played if 6CH INPUT appears.
Press 6CH INPUT to turn off 6CH INPUT.
If you select and play a video source when 6CH INPUT
appears, the playback result will be a video image from the video
source and the sound from the audio source selected by using
6CH INPUT.
y
The current input mode is also shown. Refer to Input Modes and
Indications on page 23 for details.
SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ON
Front panel
VOLUME
Front panel
Remote control
6CH INPUT
Front panel
Input source
BASIC OPERATION
STANDBY
/ON
Front panel Remote control
or
or
or
Remote control
INPUT
Front panel
(HTR-5450)
0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM21
22
5 Play the source.
Refer to the instructions for the source component (and
TUNING for details).
Note
When controlling an audio/video component (MD recorder, CD
player, DVD player, tape deck, etc.) with the remote control, press
one of the component selector buttons, (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/
LD, etc.), which corresponds to the component you want to
control. Refer to PRESET REMOTE CONTROL.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc.
These controls are only effective for the sound from the
main speakers.
BASS controls the low-frequency response.
TREBLE controls the high-frequency response.
BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume
from the right and left main speakers.
7 Use the digital sound field processor.
Refer to Selecting a DSP Program.
To mute the sound
Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output.
Press MUTE on the remote
control.
To restore the audio output to
the previous volume level, press
MUTE again.
Note
During muting, MUTE ON appears on the display.
When you have finished using this
unit
Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to set this
unit in the standby mode.
PLAYING A SOURCE
Notes on the digital signal
The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle
96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a
source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set
the player for digital output. Refer to the operation
instructions for the player.) Note the following when a
96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
1. The following indication will appear on the display.
2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output
as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and
right main speakers.
Note
If MAIN SP in the SET MENU is set to SMALL and
BASS OUT is set to SWFR or BASS OUT is set to
BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer.
3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on
page 37 cannot be made (except the level of the
subwoofer)
BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to combine a video image
from a video source with a sound from an audio source.
(For example, you can listen to classical music while you
are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled
with the remote control.
Play a video source, and then select an audio source with
the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV
function does not work if you select the audio source with
INPUT l / h on the front panel.
PROGRAM
Front panel
Remote control
or
VOLUME
Front panel Remote control
or
BASS BALANCE
+
LR
TREBLE
+
Front panel
PCM
KZ
H
HTR-5450 only
0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM22
23
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Notes on playing a source
encoded with a DTS signal
If the digital output data of the player has been processed
in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS
decoding even if you make a digital connection between
this unit and the player.
If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set
the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the
noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to
play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a
digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or
DTS.
If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing
a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces
no sound.
The following phenomena may occur if the input mode
is set to AUTO when playing back a source encoded with
DTS:
If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS
signal, this unit automatically switches to the DTS-
decoding mode to prevent noise from being generated
during subsequent operation. (The t indicator
lights up on the display.) The t indicator may flash
immediately after playback of a source encoded with a
DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a
DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is
flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.)
If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the
input mode back to AUTO.
The t indicator may flash when a search or skip
operation is performed. If this status continues for a
certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch
from the DTS-decoding mode to PCM digital signal
input mode and the t indicator will go out.
Input Modes and Indications
When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on
the component selector.
This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component
is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set
the priority of the input signal.
Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control) repeatedly
until the desired input mode is shown on the
display.
PLAYING A SOURCE
Front panel
or
Remote control
Input mode
AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is
automatically selected in the following
order:
1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal
2) Digital (PCM) signal
3) Analog signal
DTS: In this mode, only the digital input
signal encoded with DTS is selected
even if another signal is input at the
same time.
ANALOG (ANLG): In this mode, only the analog input
signal is selected even if a digital
signal is input at the same time.
Notes
If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is
selected.
When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal,
the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and
reproduces 5.1 channel source.
The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and
DVD players in the following situation:
When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is
performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback
is resumed.
Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when
playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode
set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG.
INPUT MODE
0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM23
24
Selecting a DSP Program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. Refer to SOUND FIELD PROGRAM for
details about each program.
y
Make sure that the sound effect is turned on (see page 25).
On the remote control
1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
2 Press PRG+ or PRG
repeatedly to select the
desired program.
The name of the selected
program appears for a moment
and the selected DSP program
indicator lights up on the
display.
1
2
PROGRAM
DSP
DIGITAL
MOVIE THEATER 1
BASS EXT.
PLAYING A SOURCE
DSP program name
On the front panel
Press PROGRAM l or h
repeatedly to select the
desired program.
The name of the selected
program appears for a moment
and the selected DSP program
indicator lights up on the
display.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
PROGRAM /
DSP program name
DSP
DIGITAL
MOVIE THEATER 1
BASS EXT.
(HTR-5450)
y
If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each
speaker. (Refer to DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS on page 37 for details.)
Notes
Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and
not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening
room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in
your room to maximize the effect created by the program.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last DSP program used with that source.
When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source
and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected
when you turn on the power again.
If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is
set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the
appropriate decoding program.
When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard
from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be
heard from the center speaker. However, if CENTER SP in the
SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output
from the main speakers.
When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack of this unit is
selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.
When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the
DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is
reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.
HTR-5450 only
0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM24
25
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT
CINEMA
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field
effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using
YAMAHA original technology, natural surround
reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual
speaker.
The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode by setting REAR LR SP on the SET
MENU to NON. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by
using the main speakers.
Note
This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
REAR LR SP is set to NON in the following cases:
when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY
DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected;
when the sound effect is turned off;
when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;
when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played;
when using the test tone;
when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT
CINEMA); or
when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.
SILENT CINEMA
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of
the DSP program while using headphones. This feature
delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening
through the speakers.
You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your
headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers
are on.
EFFECT
Front panel
PLAYING A SOURCE
or
Canceling the Sound Effect (turning
off the effect speakers)
Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and
monitor only the main sound.
Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on.
Notes
If the sound effect is canceled when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed
and output from the main speakers.
If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not
output normally, depending on the source. In that case, turn back
on the sound effect.
Remote control
HTR-5450 only
0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM25
26
TUNING
Connecting the Antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal
strength.
Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.
Indoor FM
antenna
(included)
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
5
4
Antenna stand
AM loop
antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and
minimum interference, connect
the antenna GND terminal to a
good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
Connecting the indoor FM antenna
Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT
75 UNBAL. terminal.
Note
Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM
antenna at the same time.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal
hole.
2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the
AM ANT and GND terminals.
3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires.
Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good
connection.
4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.
5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best
reception is obtained.
y
The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and
attached to a wall, etc.
Notes
The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer
reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor
reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the
quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer
or service center about the outdoor antennas.
1
2
3
FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General
models only)
Because the interstation frequency spacing
differs in different areas, set the
FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the
rear) according to the frequency spacing in
your area.
North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/
10 kHz
Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC
power plug of this unit from the AC outlet.
100
K
H
Z
/10
K
H
Z
50
K
H
Z
/9
K
H
Z
FM/AM
FREQUENCY
STEP
(U.S.A. model)
0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM26
27
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
TUNING
Automatic Tuning
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Use INPUT l / h to select
TUNER as the input
source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM
or AM).
FM or AM appears on the display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MANL MONO) so
that the AUTO indicator lights up on the
display.
If z appears on the display next to the band
indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it
off.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
3
2
1
4
INPUT
PRESET/TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
FM/AM
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l once to tune in to a
lower frequency and h once to tune in to a
higher frequency.
Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop
at the desired station.
y
Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop
at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak).
When tuned in to a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and
the frequency of the received station is shown on the display.
Manual Tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you
must tune in to it manually.
1 Use INPUT l / h to select
TUNER as input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM
or AM).
FM or AM appears on the display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MANL MONO) so
that the AUTO indicator goes off.
If z appears on the display next to the band
indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it
off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to tune in to
the desired station.
To continue the tuning search, hold down the button.
Note
If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically
received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality.
or
Lights up
Turn z off
or
Goes off
Turn z off
(HTR-5450)
0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM27
28
TUNING
Automatic Preset Tuning (for FM
stations only)
You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function
for FM stations only. This function enables the unit to
automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially
store up to 40 FM stations (5 groups x 8 stations).
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MANL MONO) so
that the AUTO indicator lights up on the
display.
3 Hold down MEMORY (MANL/AUTO FM) for
about 3 seconds.
The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
preset tuning begins from the frequency currently
displayed toward the higher frequencies.
Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ...
A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are
stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C,
D and E) in that order.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which the unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after
pressing MEMORY in step 3),
1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l or h to
select the preset number with which the first station will
be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn z off and
then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward
lower frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is
completed
The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.
Check the contents and the number of preset stations by
following the procedure in the section To Recall a Preset
Station on page 29.
Notes
A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.
The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.
You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM
station by simply using the manual preset tuning method.
Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored
up to E8, automatic preset tuning is automatically ended after
searching for all stations.
Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by
automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in
signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store
it by using the manual preset tuning method.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.
If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,
the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again
by using preset tuning methods.
Lights up
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
213
FM/AM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
BASS EXT.
AUTO
Flashes
(HTR-5450)
0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM28
29
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
TUNING
Manual Preset Tuning
You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations)
manually.
1 Tune in to the desired station.
Refer to Automatic/Manual Tuning for the tuning
procedure.
2 Press MEMORY (MANL/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the
desired group (A to E) of preset stations
before the MEMORY indicator goes off.
Make sure that z appears on the display. The
selected group appears on the display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) with which you
want to store the station before the MEMORY
indicator goes off.
Press l to select a lower preset
station number and h to select
a higher preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MANL/AUTO FM) before the
MEMORY indicator goes off.
The displayed station has been stored as the preset
group and number you have selected, and the reception
band and frequency appear and the TUNED indicator
lights up on the display.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Notes
A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.
The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.
To Recall a Preset Station
You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number with which it was stored.
You can also recall a preset station with the remote control.
Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector and press
TUNER on the input selector.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group
of preset stations.
Make sure that z appears on the display.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h (or PRESET
/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the display
along with the reception band, frequency, and the
TUNED indicator lights up.
PRESET/TUNING
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
1
2
1
2
AUTO
STEREO
TUNED
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
A/B/C/D/E
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
3
2,5
4
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO
STEREO
TUNED
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
Flashes
Front panel
or
Remote control
Front panel
or
Remote control
(HTR-5450)
(HTR-5450)
0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM29
30
TUNING
Exchanging Preset Stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other.
Example: Exchange preset station E1 with A5
1 Recall preset station E1.
Refer to the procedure in the section To Recall a
Preset Station on page 29.
2 Hold down (PRESET/
TUNING) EDIT for about
3 second.
E1 and the MEMORY
indicator flash.
3 Recall preset station A5 by using the buttons
on the front panel.
A5 and the MEMORY indicator flash.
4 Press (PRESET/TUNING)
EDIT again.
The display shows the
exchange of stations has been
completed.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2,4
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORY
BASS EXT.
MEMORY
BASS EXT.
MEMORY
Flashes
Flashes
(HTR-5450)
0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM30
31
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
RECORDING A SOURCE
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
+
LR
TREBLE
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2
1,4
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed
from the recording component. Refer to the instructions for
these components.
Notes
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE
and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded.
A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot
be recorded.
A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records,
CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe
copyright laws.
Composite video and S video signals pass independently through
this units video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals, if your video source component is connected to
provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you
can record only and an S video (or only a composite video) signal
by your VCR.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
Special considerations when
recording DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being
recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record
sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS
Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded.
Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the
players operation instructions so that the audio signals are
output from the players analog outputs.
2
4
Remote control
INPUT
Front panel
or
VOLUME
Front panel
VOLUME
Front panel
or
Remote control
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5450 only
(HTR-5450)
1 Set the volume at the
minimum level.
2 Select the source you want to record.
3 Begin recording by the recording component
connected to this unit.
4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to
confirm the input source.
0106HTR5450/5440_31_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM31
32
SET MENU
1
3,6
4,5
2
ADVANCED OPERATION
1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
3 Press PRG (or PRG+) repeatedly to select the
item (1 to 9) you want to adjust.
y
By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the
same order as when pressing PRG.
4 Press or + once to enter the setup mode of
the selected item.
The last setting you adjusted appears on the display.
Depending on the item, press PRG (or PRG+) to
select a sub item.
5 Press or + repeatedly to change the setting
of the item.
6 Press PRG (or PRG+)
repeatedly until the input
source name appears to
exit from the SET MENU.
The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker
mode setting. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum
audio/video playback for your system.
y
You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
1 SPEAKER SET
CENTER SP
MAIN SP
REAR LR SP
BASS OUT
MAIN LVL
2 HP TONE CTRL
3 I/O ASSIGN
4 INPUT MODE
5 DOLBY D. SET
LFE LEVEL
D-RANGE
6 DTS SET
7 SP DLY TIME
8 DISPLAY SET
9 MEM. GUARD
Adjusting the Items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Note
Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.
0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM32
33
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
MAIN SP (main speaker mode)
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
Initial setting: LARGE
LARGE
Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range
of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the
left and right main speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel
are directed to the speakers selected with BASS OUT.
Note
When you select MAIN for BASS OUT, the low-frequency
signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the
main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker
mode.
REAR LR SP (rear speaker mode)
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if
a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left
and right rear speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The
low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with BASS
OUT.
NON
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting
NON for REAR LR SP.
SET MENU
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than
one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted
will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items
again.
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
Notes
When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level
adjustments in items of 1 SPEAKER SET are not affected
(except MAIN LVL).
When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level
adjustments in items MAIN SP, BASS OUT and MAIN
LVL are possible, but those in items CENTER SP and REAR
LR SP are not affected.
CENTER SP (center speaker mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
the unit can provide good dialog localization for many
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel
are directed to the speakers selected with BASS OUT.
NON
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signals are directed to the left and right main
speakers.
HTR-5450 only
0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM33
34
BASS OUT (bass out mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below.
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH
Initial setting: BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
MAIN
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals
are directed to the main speakers.
BOTH
Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the
main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals.
Notes
When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette
etc.), select BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below
90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack.
When you select SMALL (SML) for items CENTER SP,
MAIN SP and REAR LR SP, the low-frequency signals
(90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and
output to the subwoofer.
MAIN LVL (main level mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of
the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because
of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main
speakers.
Choices: NORM (normal), 10 dB
Initial setting: NORM
NORM (normal)
Normally select this setting.
10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of your
effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using
the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output
level to about one-third of the normal level.
2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone
control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB): 6 to +3
Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)
3 I/O ASSIGN
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to
be used if this units DIGITAL jack settings (component
names for terminals) differ from that component. This
makes it possible to change the jack assignment and
effectively connect more component.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons).
3A (1) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT
jack)
Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R
3B (2) to (4) (for the OPTICAL
INPUT jacks)
Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R
(3) DVD
(4) D-TV/CBL
SET MENU
HTR-5450
0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM34
35
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
3C (5) (for the COAXIAL INPUT
jack)
Initial setting: (5) CD
Note
You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
3A (1) and (2) (for the OPTICAL
INPUT jacks)
Initial settings: (1) DVD
(2) D-TV/CBL
3B (3) (for the COAXIAL INPUT
jack)
Initial setting: (3) CD
Note
You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning
on the power of this unit with the source component
connected to more than one type of input jacks.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Initial setting: AUTO
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type
of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for that source.
5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set)
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby
Digital signals.
LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby
Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency
special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes.
Control value (dB): 20 to 0
Initial setting: 0 dB
Notes
Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer.
Normally, around 6 dB to 8 dB is most suitable for listening at
home.
D-RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference
between the maximum level and the minimum level of
sounds).
Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN
Initial setting: MAX
Select MAX for feature films.
Select STD for general use.
Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low
volume level.
SET MENU
dB
Input level
Input level
L-LEVEL BST
H-LEVEL CUT
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
MAX
Dialog
level
Input level
Output level
STD
Dialog
level
Output level
MIN
Dialog
level
Output level
Note
When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because
some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the
minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD.
HTR-5440
HTR-5440
0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM35
36
SET MENU
ms
6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level)
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS
signals.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal.
The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect
sound which is only added to certain scenes.
Control range (dB): 10 to +10
Initial setting: 0 dB
Note
Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer.
7 SP DLY TIME (center delay)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel
sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be
the same distance from the listening position as the left and
right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the
center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By
delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent
distance from the center speaker to the listening position can
be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance
between the left and right main speakers to the listening
position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is
especially important for giving depth to the dialog.
Control range (ms): 0 to 5
Initial setting: 0 ms
dB
L
C
C
R
RL
RR
Center speaker image
y
Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of
the center speaker.
8 DISPLAY SET
DIMMER
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Control range : 4 to 0
Initial setting: 0
9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to the setting
of the SET MENU and other settings on this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
Initial setting: OFF
Select ON to protect the following features:
All SET MENU items
Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels
Delay time adjusted by using TIME/LEVEL
Notes
When 9 MEM. GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use the test
tone.
When 9 MEM. GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select any
other SET MENU items.
0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM36
37
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby
Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder,
you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and
sound effect, and each speakers output level as you wish.
Delay Time
You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of
the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the
sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value,
the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be
individually adjusted to all DSP programs.
Notes
Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some
sources.
The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay
time.
Program Preset value (ms)
1. CONCERT HALL 45
2. JAZZ CLUB 30
3. ROCK CONCERT 15
4. DISCO 26
5CH STEREO 2
GAME 36
5. TV SPORTS 10
6. MONO MOVIE 69
7. 70 mm SPECTACLE 23
DGTL SPECTACLE 13
DTS SPECTACLE 13
70 mm SCI-FI 20
DGTL SCI-FI 16
DTS SCI-FI 16
8. 70 mm ADVENTURE 20
DGTL ADVENTURE 15
DTS ADVENTURE 15
70 mm GENERAL 20
DGTL GENERAL 15
DTS GENERAL 15
9. PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 20
DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5
DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5
PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20
DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5
DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5
Sound Output Level of the Center,
Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers,
and Subwoofer
If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each
speaker even if it has already been adjusted in
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE procedure.
Notes
If CENTER SP in the SET MENU is set to the NON position,
the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted.
This is because the center channel sound is automatically output
from the right and left main speakers.
Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be
the same for all DSP programs.
Speaker Preset value (dB)
Center 0
Right rear 0
Left rear 0
Subwoofer 0
0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM37
38
1
3
2
DELAY
CENTER
R SUR.
L SUR.
SWFR
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
Adjusting Method
Adjustments should be performed with the remote control
while watching the information on the display.
1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the
item you want to adjust.
Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item
changes and appears on the display as below.
Delay time
Center speaker output level
Right rear speaker output level
Left rear speaker output level
Subwoofer output level
Note
Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able
to select all these items.
3 Press or + to adjust the
delay time or speaker
output levels.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of
any other item.
Notes
If CENTER SP or REAR LR SP is set to NON, or BASS
OUT is set to MAIN, the output level of that speaker cannot be
adjusted.
When you adjust the output level with TIME/LEVEL, the settings
you made with the test tone will be changed.
To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting
procedure using test tones on page 19 is recommended.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.
If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,
the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/
subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically
return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time
and output levels again.
0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM38
39
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
SLEEP TIMER
The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit
in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are
going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired
input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the
remote control.
Notes
First press AMP(TUNER), TAPE/MD, CD or DVD/LD on the
component selector to set the SLEEP timer for this unit.
The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit.
Setting the SLEEP Timer
1 Play a source you want to enjoy when you are
going to sleep.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to
select the desired SLEEP
time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the
SLEEP time will change as
below:
3 The SLEEP indicator soon lights up on the
display after the SLEEP timer has been set.
The display returns to the previous indication.
Canceling the SLEEP Timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until SLEEP OFF
appears on the display.
It will soon disappear and the SLEEP indicator will
go off.
Note
The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the
standby mode by using POWER on the remote control (or
STANDBY/ON), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from
the AC power outlet.
120 90 60 30
The SLEEP timer is off
(SLEEP OFF).
(This is the state before
SLEEP is pressed.)
SLEEP
BASS EXT.
Flashes
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
Lights up
0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM39
40
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is
also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper
manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component).
Note
For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual.
Component Selector Buttons
There are eight component selector buttons. Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to
control with the remote control. For example, if you press CD on the component selector, the remote control is set to the CD
operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled.
5
3
2
4
7
6
AMP(TUNER)
You can perform the basic operations of this
unit.
CD
The code for a YAMAHA CD player is
factory set.
DVD/LD & DVD MENU
An LD player can be controlled in
the DVD/LD mode. A DVD player can be
controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU
modes. The code for a YAMAHA DVD
player is factory set.
TAPE/MD
The code for a YAMAHA MD deck is factory
set. (The code for the YAMAHA CD recorder
and tape deck can also be set.)
VCR
A VCR can be controlled.
TV
A TV can be controlled.
CBL/SAT
A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled.
Notes
The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the operation mode. Refer to the following pages for details.
When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 49 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your
YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code.
Controlling the Components
Connected to This Unit
Example: To control YAMAHA CD
player
1 Make sure that the volume is set at the
minimum level.
2 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
3 Turn on the power.
4 Press CD on the input selector.
5 Press CD on the
component selector.
6 Press p.
Refer to Description of Each
Mode for the CD player
operation buttons.
7 Adjust the volume.
If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes
listed from page i at the end of this manual, you
can control other brands of components. Refer to
Setting the Manufacturer Code for details.
0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM40
41
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Description of Each Mode
TAPE/MD MODE
Note
TV VOLUME functions if you have set the code for your TV.
DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)
SLEEP
EFFECT
6CH INPUT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
POWER
This button turns this unit on if you have set the code
for a YAMAHA tape deck, MD recorder or CD
recorder. This button turns on the tape deck, MD
recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with
a power button if you have set the code.
r REC/PAUSE
This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck
or MD recorder.
p PLAY
This button plays a tape, an MD or CD-R.
b DIR A (TAPE)
This button selects the playing direction of deck A.
SKIP (MD/CD-R)
This button skips to the previous track.
w REWIND (TAPE)
This button rewinds a tape.
SEARCH (MD/CD-R)
This button initiates a backward search on the track
that is playing to find the point from which you want
to listen.
Press TAPE/MD.
Input selector buttons
DECK A/B (TAPE)
This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette
tape deck.
e PAUSE (MD/CD-R)
This button gives a pause in operation.
a DIR B (TAPE)
This button selects the playing direction of deck B.
SKIP+ (MD/CD-R)
This button skips to the next track.
s STOP
This button stops operation on a tape deck, MD
recorder or CD recorder.
f FAST FORWARD (TAPE)
This button winds a tape fast forward.
SEARCH (MD/CD-R)
This button initiates a fast-forward search on the
track that is playing to find the point from which you
want to listen.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM41
42
CD MODE
Note
TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.
DISPLAY
SLEEP
EFFECT
6CH INPUT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV INPUT
Press CD.
POWER
This button turns this unit on if you have set the code
for a YAMAHA CD player. This button turns on the CD
player that has a remote control with a power button if
you have set the code.
p PLAY
This button plays a CD.
b SKIP
This button skips to the beginning of the previous
track.
w SEARCH
This button initiates a backward search on the track
that is playing to find the point from which you want
to listen.
Input selector buttons
DISC SKIP /+ (for a CD player with CD
changer)
These buttons skip to the next or previous CD.
e PAUSE
This button gives a pause in operation. The
button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating
a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting.
a SKIP+
This button skips to the beginning of the next
track.
s STOP
This button stops operation. The button functions
as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD
players.
f SEARCH
This button initiates a fast-forward search on the
track that is playing to find the point from which
you want to listen.
y
PAUSE/STOP function
Press the button once to give a pause
in operation and press once more to
stop operation.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM42
43
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
DVD/LD MODE
Note
TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.
CLEAR
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
RETURN
MENU UP
MUTE
MENU LEFT
MENU DOWN
TITLE
DISC SKIP /+
INDEX
MENU SELECT
MENU
+10
MENU RIGHT
EFFECT
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
SLEEP
MUTE
SKIP
STOP
SEARCH
DISC SKIP /+
6CH INPUT
DISPLAY
PAUSE
PLAY
SEARCH
SKIP +
Press DVD/LD.
POWER
This button turns this unit on if you have
set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD
player. This button turns on the DVD or
LD player that has a remote control with a
power button if you have set the code.
DVD MENU MODE
Notes
TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.
DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.
Input selector buttons
Press DVD MENU.
POWER
This button turns this unit on if you have
set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD
player. This button turns on the DVD or
LD player that has a remote control with
a power button if you have set the code.
Numeric buttons
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM43
44
VCR MODE
Note
TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have
set the code for your TV.
EFFECT
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV SLEEP
MUTE
VCR STOP
VCR REWIND
VCR CHANNEL /+
DISPLAY
VCR PAUSE
VCR PLAY
VCR
FAST FORWARD
CHANNEL
ENTER
CHANNEL
VCR POWER
+100
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV SLEEP
MUTE
MENU LEFT
MENU UP
MENU DOWN
RECALL
CBL/SAT
CHANNEL /+
DISPLAY
MENU SELECT
MENU
CHANNEL
ENTER
MENU RIGHT
CBL/SAT POWER
CHANNEL
EFFECT
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV SLEEP
TV MUTE
VCR STOP
VCR REWIND
TV CHANNEL /+
DISPLAY
VCR PAUSE
VCR PLAY
VCR
FAST FORWARD
CHANNEL
ENTER
CHANNEL
TV POWER
VCR REC
Press this button twice to
start recording.
CBL/SAT MODE
Note
TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have
set the code for your TV.
Press VCR.
Press CBL/SAT.
TV MODE
Note
You can control your VCR if you have set the
code for it.
Press TV.
VCR REC
Press this button twice.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM44
45
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Setting the Manufacturer Code
You can set the code for the manufacturer of your
component after pressing the component selector buttons
other than AMP(TUNER).
1 Turn on your component to be used.
2 Press one of the
component selector
buttons which
corresponds to the
component to be
controlled.
3 Press both VOLUME
buttons (u/d) at the same
time for about four
seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons to
enter the four-digit
manufacturer code for the
component to be used.
Make sure that the
indicator flashes twice.
If the indicator does not flash,
repeat step 3 and re-enter the
code.
5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the
remote control to check if you have set the
code correctly.
If your component cannot be
controlled with the remote
control, try setting another code
for the same manufacturer.
Notes
You can set only one code for one mode.
In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes:
Be sure to press DVD/LD on the component selector before
entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set the code
for a DVD player after pressing DVD MENU on the component
selector. The code set in the DVD/LD mode is also
simultaneously set in the DVD MENU mode.
If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for
the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with
your component.
To use a second (and third) VCR
You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT
and DVD MENU modes if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or
DVD player is not being used.
Note
In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU
mode, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in
the DVD/LD mode.
1 Turn on the VCR to be used.
2 Press CBL/SAT or DVD
MENU on the component
selector.
3 Press both VOLUME
buttons (u/d) at the same
time for about four
seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons to
enter the four-digit code
for the second (and third)
VCR. Make sure that the
indicator flashes twice.
If the indicator does not flash,
repeat step 3 and re-enter the
code.
5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the
remote control to check if you have set the
code correctly.
If the VCR cannot be controlled
with the remote control, try
setting another code for the
same manufacturer.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM45
46
Returning to the Factory Setting
To return to the factory-set codes
in all modes
1 Press one of the
component selector
buttons other than
AMP(TUNER).
2 Press both VOLUME
buttons (u/d) at the same
time for about four
seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
3 Enter the code number
9990.
Make sure that the indicator
flashes twice.
To return to the factory-set codes
in each mode
1 Press one of the
component selector
buttons which
corresponds to the
component to be returned
to the factory-set code.
2 Press both VOLUME
buttons (u/d) at the same
time for about four
seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
3 Enter the code number
0000.
Make sure that the indicator
flashes twice.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
The following codes are factory set.
Component selector button Component Code Set component Set code
TV TV 0101
CBL/SAT Cable TV 0006
VCR VCR 0002
DVD/LD DVD player 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player)
CD CD player 0005 (YAMAHA CD player)
TAPE/MD MD recorder 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder)
We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above.
0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM46
47
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
2 JAZZ CLUB
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play
back various sound fields for the source you are listening to.
Note
Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you.
Hi-Fi DSP Programs
For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4
No. Program (group) Sub-program Features
1 CONCERT HALL
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field
suitable for background music at parties.
Note
Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The
sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded
with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.)
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz
club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a
real and vibrant sound.
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from
all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of
presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.
3 ROCK CONCERT
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was
recorded at LAs hottest rock club. The listeners virtual seat is at the center-left of
the hall.
4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big
city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-
energy, immediate sound.
5CH STEREO
CINEMA DSP Programs
For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6
No. Program (group) Sub-program Features
4 ENTERTAINMENT GAME
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
5 TV SPORTS Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field
employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can
enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs
or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is
oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium
spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old
movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by
using only the presence sound field.
6 MONO MOVIE
0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM47
48
8 MOVIE THEATER 2 ADVENTURE 70 mm
ADVENTURE
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the
sound design of the newest 70-mm and
multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is
made to be similar to that of the newest movie
theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field
itself are restrained as much as possible.
GENERAL 70 mm GENERAL This program is for reproducing sounds from
70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is
characterized by a soft and extensive sound field.
The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It
spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,
restraining the echo effect of conversations without
losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the
harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a
wide space at the rear of the sound field.
DOLBY DIGITAL/
NORMAL
DTS DIGITAL
SUR./
ENHANCED
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
DGTL
ADVENTURE
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS ADVENTURE DTS
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS GENERAL DTS
9 q/DTS
SURROUND
NORMAL PRO LOGIC/
NORMAL
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS DIGITAL
SUR./NORMAL
DTS
The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds
and sound effects from sources.
The highly efficient decoding process improves
crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound
positioning smoother and more precise.
In this program, the digital sound field processor is
not turned on.
ENHANCED PRO LOGIC/
ENHANCED
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
DOLBY DIGITAL/
ENHANCED
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS
This program ideally simulates the multi-surround
speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby
Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or
DTS decoding and digital sound field processing
create precise effects without altering the original
sound orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field
wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to
the left and right, and toward the screen.
For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9
No. Program (group) Sub-program Input source Features
7 MOVIE THEATER 1 SPECTACLE 70 mm
SPECTACLE
This program creates the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely
reproduces the source sound in detail, making both
the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is
ideal for any kind of video source encoded with
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially
large-scale movie productions).
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
DGTL
SPECTACLE
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS SPECTACLE DTS
SCI-FI 70 mm SCI-FI Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound
effects in the latest sound form of science fiction
films, thus creating a broad and expansive
cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy
science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field
that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most
advanced techniques.
DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS SCI-FI DTS
Notes
The x indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program NORMAL of the q/DTS SURROUND program.
If CENTER SP in the SET MENU is set to NON, no sound is output from the center speaker.
The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5
to 8.
0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM48
49
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
Presence DSP
sound field
Surround DSP
sound field
MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2
Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by
Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend
to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.
The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using
matrix processing. This units MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization
that 6-channel soundtracks do.
When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel
These programs express an immense sound field and a large
surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the
main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo
theater.
70 mm SPECTACLE
70 mm SCI-FI
70 mm ADVENTURE
70 mm GENERAL
The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home.
With the units MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a
public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology.
When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP)
These programs use YAMAHAs tri-field DSP processing on
each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left
surround and right surround channels. This processing enables
this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround
expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-equipped movie theater
without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels.
DGTL SPECTACLE
DTS SPECTACLE
DGTL SCI-FI
DTS SCI-FI
DGTL ADVENTURE
DTS ADVENTURE
DGTL GENERAL
DTS GENERAL
Presence DSP
sound field
Right surround DSP
sound field
Left surround DSP
sound field
y
If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to
the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.
0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM49
50
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or
if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX
Refer to
page
The unit fails to turn on
when STANDBY/ON (or
POWER) is pressed, or
enters in the standby
mode soon after the
power has been turned
on.
The power cord is not connected or the plug is
not completely inserted.
Firmly connect the power cord.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the
rear panel is not fully set to the left or right
position.
Set the switch fully to the left or right position
when the unit is in the standby mode.
The protection circuit has been activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the
wire for each connection does not touch
anything other than its respective connection.
No sound and/or no
picture.
Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT
l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector
buttons).
The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
The main speakers to be used have not been
selected properly.
Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A
and/or B.
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel
a mute and adjust the volume.
Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby
Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot
reproduce are being input to this unit by playing
a CD-ROM, etc.
Play a source whose signals this unit can
reproduce.
The picture does not
appear.
The output and input for the video are
connected to different types of video jacks.
Make connections using the same type of jack
(between composites, S-VIDEOs, or
components) for both the input and output.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is
set to the appropriate position and then turn the
unit back on.
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn the unit back on.
18
18
16, 17
12 15
21
16, 17
21
22
22
14, 15
18
16, 17
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5450 only
The sleep timer has functioned.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel
a mute and adjust the volume.
Only the speaker on one
side can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
39
22
12 17
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM50
51
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
TROUBLESHOOTING
No sound from the effect
speakers.
The sound effect is off.
Press EFFECT to turn it on.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
decoding DSP program is being used with
material not encoded with Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital or DTS.
Select another DSP program.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input
to this unit.
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is set to
minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
CENTER SP in the SET MENU is set to
NON.
Select the appropriate mode for your center
speaker.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been
selected.
Select another DSP program.
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal does not have a center channel
signal.
No sound from the rear
speakers.
The output level of the rear speakers is set to
minimum.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
A monaural source is being played with the
program 9.
Select another DSP program.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set to
MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is
being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is
being played.
Select BOTH.
The source does not contain low bass signals
(90 Hz and below).
Poor bass reproduction.
BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or BOTH and your system does not
include a subwoofer.
Select MAIN.
25
47, 48
22
37
33
47, 48
37
47, 48
34
34
34
HTR-5450 only
The output mode for each speaker (main, center
or rear) in the SET MENU does not match your
speaker configuration.
Select the appropriate output mode for each
speaker based on the size of the speakers in
your configuration.
A humming sound can
be heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
33, 34
12 15
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM51
52
TROUBLESHOOTING
12 15
The volume level cannot
be increased, or the
sound is distorted.
The component connected to the REC OUT
jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
The effect and surround
sounds cannot be
recorded.
It is not possible to record the effect and
surround sounds by a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded.
An analog source is being input during digital
recording.
Input a digital source.
The settings of the SET
MENU and some other
settings on this unit
cannot be changed.
9 MEM. GUARD in the SET MENU is set
to ON.
Select OFF.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen by
an external electric shock (such as lightning or
excessive static electricity) or by a power
supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
The sound is degraded
when listening with
headphones connected
to a tape deck or CD
player that is connected
to this unit.
This unit is in the standby mode.
Turn on the power of the unit.
There is noise
interference from digital
or high-frequency
equipment, or the unit.
Move the unit further away from such
equipment.
Refer to
page
The unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Problem Cause Remedy
31
39
A source component and recording
component are not digitally connected to the
unit.
Make digital connections.
A digital source is being input during analog
recording.
Input an analog source.
A source component and recording
component are not analog connected to the
unit.
Make analog connections.
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5450 only
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM52
53
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you
mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect
the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.
TROUBLESHOOTING
FM
AM
26
27
28
26
26
Tuner
Problem
FM stereo reception
is noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts
may cause this problem when the transmitter is
too far away or the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in
with the automatic
tuning method.
The station is too weak.
Use the manual tuning method.
Previously preset
stations can no
longer be tuned in.
The unit has been disconnected for a long
period.
Re-store the stations.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna connections
are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and
orient it for best reception.
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
There are buzzing and
whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
Cause
Remedy
Refer to
page
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This
will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps,
motors, thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV.
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control does
not work nor function
properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type
of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote
control sensor of this unit.
Reposition the unit.
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries with new ones.
The unit or other
component cannot be
controlled.
The component to be controlled has not been
selected.
Press one of the component selector buttons,
corresponding to the component to be
controlled.
The remote control cannot control system
components.
The manufacturer code has not been set up
properly.
Enter the code again.
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer.
Depending on the manufacturer or the model,
some components cannot be controlled with this
units remote control even though the code has
been set up properly.
Use the original remote control supplied with
your component.
7
7
3
40
45
Remote control
26
Use the manual tuning method.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
27
26
27
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM53
54
SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5450)
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Australia, Singapore, China and General models]
....................................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono/Stereo ............................. 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ..................................... 70 dB
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB
Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, 2.0 dB
AM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 530 to 1710 kHz
[Australia and Singapore models] ............................ 531 to 1611 kHz
[China and General models]
10 kHz step ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz
9 kHz step .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz
[Singapore model] ................................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz
[China model] .......................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz
[General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model] ......................................................................... 240 W
[Australia, Singapore, China and General models]
............................................................................................... 250 W
[Canada model] ........................................................... 250 W/320 VA
Standby Mode
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 0.90 W
[Australia and Singapore models] ........................................ 0.96 W
Maximum Power Consumption
[General model only]
5CH, 10% THD ........................................................................ 500 W
AC Outlets
2 (SWITCHED)
[U.S.A., Canada and Singapore models] .... Total 100 W maximum
[China and General models] ......................... Total 50 W maximum
1 (SWITCHED)
[Australia model] ........................................ Total 100 W maximum
Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm
Weight ....................................................................................... 10.0 kg
Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control
........................................................................................... Batteries
............................................................................. AM loop antenna
.......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna
...................................................................... Quick Reference Card
............................................................................ Connection Guide
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... 80 W
[Singapore, China and General models] ................................. 70 W
Maximum power
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 100 W
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ........................................................ 100 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 ohms
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 105/125/145/165 W
[China and General models] .............................. 95/115/135/155 W
Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more
Frequency Response
CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms)
................................................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 ohms)
.................................................................................. 0.025% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted)
................................................................................ 100 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less
Channel Separation
CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (1 kHz) .................................................. 60 dB
(10 kHz) ................................................ 45 dB
Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
Phones Output .......................................................... 490 mV/390 ohms
Input Sensitivity
CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms
6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms
Maximum Input Signal
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more
Output Level
REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms
SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .......................... NTSC
[Australia and Singapore models] ............................................... PAL
Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
S-Video Signal Level
Y ............................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
C ........................................................................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms
Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video ...................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, 3 dB
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM54
55
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5440)
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ...................................... 65 W
Maximum power
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... 80 W
[Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore, China and
General models] ...................................................................... 75 W
DIN Standard Output Power
[Europe model only]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ......................................................... 95 W
IEC Output Power
[Europe model only]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 67 W
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms .......................................................... 95 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 ohms
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 95/115/135/155 W
[China and General models] .............................. 90/110/130/150 W
Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more
Frequency Response
CD, etc. to MAIN L/R .................................. 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±5 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 ohms)
.................................................................................. 0.025% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted)
................................................................................ 100 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less
Channel Separation
CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (1 kHz) .................................................. 60 dB
(10 kHz) ................................................ 45 dB
Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
Phones Output .......................................................... 470 mV/390 ohms
Input Sensitivity
CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms
6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms
Maximum Input Signal
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more
Output Level
REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms
SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .......................... NTSC
[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ........................ PAL
Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite ...................................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, 3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore, China and
General models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono/Stereo ............................. 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ..................................... 70 dB
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB
Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, 2.0 dB
AM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 530 to 1710 kHz
[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ..... 531 to 1611 kHz
[China and General models]
10 kHz step ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz
9 kHz step .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz
[Europe, U.K., and Singapore models] ................... AC 230 V/50 Hz
[China model] .......................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz
[General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model] ......................................................................... 200 W
[Canada model] .......................................................... 210 W/280 VA
[Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore China and General models]
............................................................................................... 210 W
Standby Mode
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 0.90 W
[Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore and China models] ..... 0.96 W
Maximum Power Consumption
[General model only]
5-ch, 10% THD ........................................................................ 480 W
AC Outlets
2 (SWITCHED)
[U.S.A., Canada and Singapore models] .... Total 100 W maximum
[China and General models] ......................... Total 50 W maximum
1 (SWITCHED)
[Australia model] ........................................ Total 100 W maximum
Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm
Weight ......................................................................................... 9.5 kg
Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control
........................................................................................... Batteries
............................................................................. AM loop antenna
.......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna
...................................................................... Quick Reference Card
............................................................................ Connection Guide
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM55
56
GLOSSARY
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording
system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:
two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel
for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound
within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With
three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range
audio channels. With an additional channel especially for
bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system
has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).
Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume)
reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and
realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to
a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your
enjoyment.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has
developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the
depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS
digital surround in your home. This system is practically
distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left,
right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE
0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels).
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The
frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low
frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by
the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel
systems.
CINEMA DSP
DIGITAL
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally
designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in
a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic
effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall
material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so
widely, its inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data,
YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound
field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience
of movie theater in the listening room of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects
even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear
speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a
minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM56
57
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
S VIDEO signal
With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as
the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio
signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using
any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs
and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for
sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of
time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog
signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for
recording.
Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times
the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling
frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the
sound level into a numeric value is called the number of
quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by the
number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that
can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized
bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced.
I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU)
Although component is normally connected according to
jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a
function that assigns jacks according to the component
being connected. If the component being used differs from
the component name shown for this units digital jacks, it is
possible to assign jacks according to the component being
connected. This makes it possible to change the jack
assignment and effectively connect more component.
GLOSSARY
HTR-5450 only
HTR-5450 only
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM57
58
INDEX
A
AC outlets ...................................................................................... 18
Antennas ........................................................................................ 26
B
BALANCE .................................................................................... 22
BGV function ................................................................................ 22
C
CBL/SAT mode ............................................................................. 44
CD mode ........................................................................................ 42
CINEMA DSP ......................................................................... 47, 56
Connections
Antennas ................................................................................. 26
Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder and
CD player) .............................................................................. 12
External decoder ..................................................................... 12
Power supply cords ................................................................ 18
Speakers ................................................................................. 16
Video components (DVD player, VCR and
TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ............................. 14
D
Delay time ..................................................................................... 37
Display ............................................................................................. 8
DISPLAY SET (SET MENU) ....................................................... 36
DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU)
D-RANGE .............................................................................. 35
LFE LEVEL ........................................................................... 35
Dolby Digital ................................................................................. 56
Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ............................................... 56
DSP program
CINEMA DSP program .......................................................... 47
Hi-Fi DSP program ................................................................. 47
DTS ............................................................................................... 56
DTS SET (SET MENU) ................................................................ 36
Dust protection cap ........................................................................ 12
DVD/LD mode .............................................................................. 43
DVD MENU mode ........................................................................ 43
E
External decoder ............................................................................ 12
F
Front panel ....................................................................................... 4
H
HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) .................................................... 34
I
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ............................................... 18
INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ....................................................... 35
Input modes ................................................................................... 23
I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) ..................................................... 34, 57
L
LFE .................................................................................... 35, 36, 56
M
Manufacturer codes .................................................................... 45, i
Memory back-up ............................................................... 28, 33, 38
MEM. GUARD (SET MENU) ...................................................... 36
Muting ........................................................................................... 22
P
Package contents ............................................................................. 3
PCM ............................................................................................... 57
Playing ........................................................................................... 21
Power supply cords ....................................................................... 18
Preset stations
Exchanging preset station ....................................................... 30
To recall a preset station ......................................................... 29
Presetting tuning
Automatic preset tuning ......................................................... 28
Manual preset tuning .............................................................. 29
R
Rear panel ........................................................................................ 9
Recording ...................................................................................... 31
Remote control
Basic operation ......................................................................... 6
Batteries .................................................................................... 3
Operation range ........................................................................ 7
Setup codes ............................................................................. 45
S
Sampling frequency (HTR-5450 only) .................................... 22, 57
SET MENU ................................................................................... 32
SILENT CINEMA ................................................................... 25, 56
Sleep timer ..................................................................................... 39
SP DLY TIME (SET MENU) ........................................................ 36
Speaker
Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) ...................................... 37
Placement ............................................................................... 10
Output balance (test tone) ...................................................... 19
SPEAKER SET (SET MENU)
BASS OUT ............................................................................. 34
CENTER SP ........................................................................... 33
MAIN LVL ............................................................................. 34
MAIN SP ................................................................................ 33
REAR LR SP .......................................................................... 33
Subwoofer ..................................................................................... 17
S VIDEO (HTR-5450 only) .......................................................... 57
T
TAPE/MD mode ............................................................................ 41
Test tone ........................................................................................ 19
Tuning
Automatic tuning .................................................................... 27
Manual tuning ........................................................................ 27
TV mode ........................................................................................ 44
V
VCR mode ..................................................................................... 44
Virtual CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 25, 56
0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM58
i
TV
A-Mark 1161
A Tandy 0941
Abex 1151
Admira 1141
Adventura 1131
Aiko 1121
Akai 0331, 1101, 1111
Alba 0431
Alleron 1091
Ambassador 1081
Amstrad 0481, 1081
Anam 0251, 1041, 1051,
1061, 1071
Anam National 1041
AOC 0361, 1021, 1031,
1111, 1161
Archer 1161
Audiosonic 1001
Audiovox 1051, 1161
Aiwa 1481
Bauer 0441
Baur 1001
Beijing 1511, 1551, 1561
Belcor 1031
Bell & Howell 0981, 0991
Beon 1001
Bradford 1051
Brockwood 1031
Broksonic 1161
Bush 1001
Candle 0351, 0361, 0961,
0971, 1111, 1131
Capehart 1021
Carver 0101
Cathay 1001
Celebrity 0951
Centurion 0411
Changhong 1541, 1551, 1561,
1621
Citizen 0351, 0361, 0921,
0931, 0941, 0961,
0971, 1111, 1121,
1131
Clairtone 1011
Clarivox 1001
Concerto 0351, 0971
Conrowa 1751
Contec 0901, 0911, 1011,
1051
Corando 0941
Craig 0251, 1051
Crown 0941, 1051
Curtis Mathes 0161, 0361, 0931,
0941, 0981, 1111
CXC 1051
Daewoo 0291, 0301, 0331,
0721, 0941, 1001,
1031, 1121, 1191,
1531, 1581, 1591,
1601
Dansai 1001
Daytron 0941, 1031
Decca 0271, 1001
Dixi 0331, 1001, 1071
Dumont 0891, 1031
Dynatech 0881
Electroband 0951, 1011
Electrohome 0941
Electron 0941
Elin 1001
Elta 0331
Emerson 0001, 0021, 0061,
0071, 0081, 0091,
0111, 0811, 0821,
0831, 0841, 0851,
0861, 0871, 0901,
0921, 0941, 0981,
1011, 1031, 1051,
1081, 1091
Envision 0361, 1111
Erres 1001
Etron 0331
Ferguson 1001
Finlux 1001
Fisher 0171, 0801, 0981
Formenti 0441
Formonti 1001
Fortress 1141
Fujitsu 1091
Funai 1051, 1091, 1501,
1521
Futuretech 1051
GE 0131, 0161, 0201,
0751, 0761, 0771,
0781, 0791, 0811,
0861, 1041
GEC 0271, 1001
Gemini 0391
Genexxa 0431
Gibralter 0891, 1031, 1111
GoldStar 0031, 0121, 0351,
0411, 0731, 0741,
0861, 0941, 0971,
1001, 1031, 1111,
1151
Goodmans/Tashiko 0271, 0661,
1001
Granada 1001
Grundig 1781, 1791, 1801,
1811, 1821, 1831,
1841, 1851, 1861,
1871, 1881
Gunpy 1051, 1091
H/K 0721
Hallmark 0861
Hanseatic 1001
Harvard 1051, 1061
Hinari 1001, 1091
Hitachi 0181, 0351, 0671,
0681, 0691, 0701,
0711, 0871, 0941,
0971, 1351
Hypson 1001
Ima 1051
Indiana 1001
Infinity Reference 0101
Interfunk 1001
ITT 0611
Janeil 1131
JBL 0101
JCB 0951
Jensen 0311
Jinxing 1531, 1541, 1551,
1561, 1571, 1621,
1631, 1641, 1651,
1691, 1731
JVC (Victor) 0261, 0281, 0641,
0651, 0661, 0841
Kawasho 0901
Penny 0161, 0361, 0521,
0531, 0621, 0731,
0751, 0761, 0781,
0791, 0861, 0931,
0941, 1031, 1041,
1111, 1151, 1161
Peony 1561, 1621
Philco 0361, 0581, 0591,
0601, 0611, 0631,
0961, 1031, 1111
Philips 0101, 0401, 1001
Phonola 1001
Pilot 0941, 1031, 1111
Pioneer 0511, 0551, 0871
Portland 0941, 1031, 1121
Priceclub 0931
Prism 0751
Proscan 0761
Protech 1001
Proton 0501, 0861, 0941,
1021, 1161
Pulsar 0891
Pulser 1031
Quasar 0251, 0751, 1041
Quelle 1001
Radio Shack 0541, 0941, 1031,
1051, 1151
Radiola 1001
RCA 0051, 0141, 0151,
0181, 0411, 0491,
0531, 0761, 0771,
0871, 1031
Realistic 0541, 0861, 0941,
0971, 0981, 1031,
1051, 1111, 1151
Rhapsody 1011
R-line 1001
Runco 0891, 1111
Saisho 0331, 1081
Sampo 0361, 0941, 1021,
1111, 1151
Samsung 0331, 0341, 0351,
0361, 0861, 0931,
0941, 0971, 1001,
1031, 1111, 1151
Samsux 0941
Sanyo 0171, 0231, 0271,
0661, 0801, 0911,
0981, 1231, 1251,
1261
SBR 1001
Schneider 1001
Scimitsu 1031
Scotch 0861
Scott 0831, 0861, 0941,
1031, 1051, 1091
Sears 0101, 0161, 0171,
0351, 0481, 0521,
0621, 0761, 0801,
0861, 0971, 0981,
1091
Shanghai 1561, 1681
Sharp 0461, 0471, 0541,
0661, 0911, 0941,
1141
Shogun 1031
Signature 0991, 1771
LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES
LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT
Kaypani 1021
Kenwood 0361, 1031, 1111
Kloss 0631, 0721, 1131
KTV 0921, 0941, 1011,
1051, 1111
Leyco 1001
Liesenk & Tter 1001
Lloytron 0941
Loewe 1001
Logik 0991, 1771
Luxman 0351, 0971
Lxi 0101, 0621, 0761,
0861, 0981
Magnavox 0101, 0341, 0391,
0401, 0411, 0421,
0581, 0591, 0601,
0611, 0631, 0661,
0961, 1111
Majestic 0991
Marantz 0101, 0221, 0361,
1001, 1111
Mark 1001
Matsui 0271, 0331, 1001
Mediator 1001
Megatron 0691, 0861, 1161
MEI 1011
M Electronic 1001
Memorex 0331, 0571, 0861,
0971, 0981, 0991,
1771
Metz 1791, 1831, 1891,
1901, 1911, 1921,
1931, 1941
MGA 0361, 0561, 0571,
0861, 1031, 1111
Midland 0751, 0761, 0891,
0941, 1151
Mitsubishi 0221, 0321, 0561,
0571, 0661, 0861,
1031, 1101, 1381
Montgomery 1091
Motorola 1041, 1141
MTC 0351, 0361, 0881,
0931, 0971, 1011,
1031, 1111
Multitech 0881, 1051
NAD 0551, 0621, 0861
NEC 0241, 0351, 0361,
0661, 0971, 1031,
1111, 1321, 1711
Neckermann 1001
Nei 1001
Nikkai 0271, 0431, 1001,
1151
Nikko 0861, 1111, 1121
Novabeam 0721
NTC 1121
Onwa 1051
Optimus 0551
Optonica 0541, 1(“1
Orion 0831, 1001
Osaki 0271, 1151
Otto Versand 1001
Panasonic 0101, 0191, 0251,
0751, 1041, 1311,
1371, 1431
Panda 1541, 1721
03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 3/28/1, 4:54 PM1
ii
Simpson 0581, 0961
Solavox 1151
Sonoko 1001
Sontec 1001
Sony 0371, 0451, 0661,
0841, 0951, 1281,
1441
Soundesign 0861, 0961, 1051,
1091
Soundwave 1001
Spectricon 1161
Squareview 0481
SSS 1031, 1051
Star-lite 1051
Suprem 0951
Supre-macy 1131
Surpa 0351, 0971
Sylvania 0101, 0361, 0441,
0581, 0591, 0601,
0611, 0631, 0961,
1111
Symphonic 0481
Sysline 1001
Tandy 0271, 0431, 1141
Tatung 0271, 0881, 1001,
1041, 1161
Tcl 1561, 1631, 1701
Technics 0751
Techwood 0351, 0751, 0971
Teknika 0101, 0351, 0571,
0931, 0941, 0961,
0971, 0991, 1031,
1051, 1091, 1121,
1131, 1771
Teletech 0331
Tera 0501
Thakral 1671
Thorm 1001
TMK 0351, 0861, 0971,
1081
Toshiba 0381, 0521, 0621,
0661, 0931, 0981,
1301
Tosonic 1011
Totevision 0941
Trical 0911
Universal 0781, 0791
Universum 1001
Vector Research 0361, 1111
Vestel 1001
Video Concept 1101
Vidikron 0101, 0211
Vidtech 0861, 1031
Viking 1131
Wards 0101, 0361, 0451,
0541, 0581, 0591,
0601, 0611, 0771,
0781, 0791, 0861,
0971, 0991, 1031,
1091, 1111, 1771
Watson 1001
Xogego 1611, 1621, 1661,
1741, 1761
Yamaha 0361, 1031, 1111
Yoko 1001
Zenith 0011, 0041, 0891,
0991, 1771
Zonda 1161
CABLE
ABC 0256, 0376
Antronix 0136
Archer 0136, 0286
BBT 0076
Cabletime 0166
Cablevision 0196
Colour Voice 0306, 0346
Comtronics 0216, 0276
Eagle Comronics 0276
Eastern 0066
Electricord 0206
Electus 0266
GE 0116, 0126
GEC Cable System 0196
Hamlin H5 0676
Hamlin H6 0666
Hamlin H6S 0656
Hamlin H8 0646
Hamlin H9 0636
Jerrold 0256
Jerrold 400L 0626
Jerrold 450L 0616
Jerrold 550 0606
Jerrold Osd Catv 0596
Jerrold Sprucer 0436
Magnavox/Philips 0416, 0426
Mamm 0296
Memorex 0386
Movie Time 0146, 0206
Northcoast 0016
NSC 0146
Oak 0106
Oak Sigma 450 0546
Oak Sigma 550 0536
Panasonic TZ 120/130 0476
Panasonic TZ 170/180 0446
Panasonic TZ140 0466
Panasonic TZ150/160 0456
Paragon 0386
Philips 0036, 0216, 0306,
0316, 0326, 0336,
0346
Pioneer 0006, 0086
Pioneer BR50 0846
Pioneer BR60/70/80/81/82
0696
Pioneer BR90 0556
Pulsar 0386
RCA Digital Satellite System
0396, 0406
Realistic 0136
Regency/Eastern0686
Runco 0386
Samsung 0276
Scientific Atlanta 175/475 0576
Scientific Atlanta 75 0366, 0586
Scientific Atlanta 8650 0566
Signal 0276
SL Marx 0276
Spectavision 0236
Standard Components 0186
Starcom V 0256
Stargate 0276
Sylvania/Texscan 0376, 0496
Teknika 0176
Teleservice 0056
Teleview 0276
Texscan 0186, 0376
TFC 0026
Tocom 0226, 0356
Tocom 5503A 0526
Tocom 5503VIP/5507 0516
Tocom TC56 0506
Toshiba 0386
Tudi 0046
Unika 0136
Universal 0136, 0156, 0206,
0286
Videoway 0096
Viewstar 0216
Zenith 0246, 0386, 0486
SATELLITE TUNER
Alpha Star 0826
Chaparral 0756
Echostar 0836
General Instrument 0776
HTS 0836
Hughes Network Systems 0816
Jerrold 0776, 0786
Panasonic 0806
Primestar 0776, 0786
RCA 0766
Sony 0796
VCR
A Tandy 0902
Adventura 0992
Aiko 0982
Aiwa 0992
Akai 0262, 0942, 0952,
0962, 0972
American High 0932
Amstrad 0992
ASA 0002, 0912
Asha 0922
Audio Dynamics 0202
Audiovox 0912
Beaumark 0922
Bell & Howell 0902
Blaupunkt 0412
Broksonic 0872, 0882, 0892
Bush 0852
Calix 0912
Canon 0862, 0932
CCE 0852, 0982
Citizen 0912, 0982
Colt 0852
Craig 0832, 0842, 0852,
0912, 0922
Curtis Mathes 0662, 0822, 0932
Cybernex 0922
Daewoo 0802, 0812, 0982
DBX 0202
Dynatech 0472, 0992
Electrohome 0912
Electrophonic 0912
Emerex 0792
Emerson 0072, 0132, 0142,
0152, 0162, 0172,
0182, 0192, 0212,
0702, 0712, 0722,
0732, 0742, 0752,
0762, 0772, 0782,
0872, 0882, 0892,
0912, 0952, 0992,
1072
Finlux 0002, 0992
Fisher 0682, 0692, 0842,
0902
Fuji 0672, 0932
Funai 0992
Garrard 0992
GE 0662, 0822, 0932
Go Video 0642, 0652
GoldStar 0082, 0632, 0912
Goodmans 0402
Gradiente 0992
Granda 0612, 0902
Grundig 0002
H/K 1082
Harley Davidson 0992
Harmon/Kardon 0632, 1082
Harwood 0752, 0852
Headquarter 0612
HI-Q 0842
Hinari 0852
Hitachi 0102, 0562, 0572,
0582, 0592, 0602,
0992
ITT 0942
JVC (Victor) 0202, 0522, 0532,
0542, 0552
Kenwood 0202, 0542, 0612,
0632, 0902
KLH 0852
Kodak 0912, 0932
Lloyd 0992
Logik 0852
Luxor 0942
LXI 0022, 0912
Magnavox 0002, 0482, 0492,
0502, 0512, 0932
Magnin 0922
Marantz 0002, 0202, 0402,
0632, 0932
Marta 0912
Matsui 0722
Matsushita 0932
MEI 0222, 0932
Memorex 0232, 0242, 0472,
0512, 0612, 0842,
0902, 0912, 0922,
0932, 0992
MGA 0762, 0952
MGA Technology 0922
Minolta 0592, 0602
Mitsubishi 0452, 0462, 0542,
0762, 0952, 1082
Motorola 0472, 0932
MTC 0922, 0992
Multitech 0852, 0992
NAD 0442
NEC 0122, 0202, 0292,
0422, 0432, 0542,
0632
Nikko 0912
Noblex 0922
Olympus 0412, 0932
Optimus 0442, 0472, 0912
Optonica 0402
Orion 0212, 0722, 0742,
0772
Osaki 0912
Panasonic 0012, 0052, 0092,
0222, 0372, 0382,
0392, 0412, 0932
Penny 0202, 0432, 0602,
0632, 0692, 0912,
0922, 0932
Pentax 0592, 0602
Perdio 0992
Philco 0002, 0932
Philips 0002, 0282, 0402,
0492, 0932
Pilot 0912
Pioneer 0442, 0542
Proscan 1002, 1012, 1022,
1032, 1042, 1052,
1062
Pulsar 0512
Quarter 0612
Quartz 0272, 0612
Quasar 0382, 0392, 0932
Radio Shack 0912, 0992
Radix 0912
Randex 0912
03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 3/28/1, 4:54 PM2
iii
RCA 0112, 0382, 0392,
0482, 0592, 0602,
0662, 0822, 0942
Realistic 0402, 0472, 0612,
0682, 0842, 0902,
0912, 0922, 0932,
0992
Ricoh 0352, 0362
Saisho 0212, 0582, 0722,
0732, 0742, 0772
Salora 0612, 0762
Samsung 0212, 0312, 0922,
0962
Sanky 0472, 0512
Sansui 0292, 0542, 0832
Sanyo 0242, 0612, 0842,
0902, 0922
SBR 0002, 0282
Schneider 0852
Scott 0342, 0712, 0762,
0872, 0882, 0892
Sears 0302, 0592, 0602,
0612, 0682, 0692,
0842, 0902, 0912,
0932
Sharp 0402, 0472
Shintom 0852
Shogun 0922
Singer 0852
Sony 0032, 0332, 0352,
0362, 0672, 0792,
0932
STS 0602
Sunpak 0352
Sylvania 0002, 0492, 0502,
0762, 0932, 0992
Symphonic 0992
Tandy 0992
Tashiko 0712, 0992
Teac 0992
Technics 0932
Teknika 0322, 0912, 0932,
0992
Telefunken 0252
TMK 0212, 0732, 0772,
0922
Toshiba 0062, 0302, 0342,
0622, 0682, 0712,
0762
Totevision 0912, 0922
Unitech 0922
Vector Research 0202, 0432, 0632
Video Concepts 0202, 0432, 0632,
0952
Wards 0322, 0402, 0472,
0482, 0602, 0712,
0842, 0852, 0922,
0932, 0992
Yamaha 0202, 0632
Zenith 0042, 0362, 0512,
0672
DVD PLAYER
Akai 0108
Denon 0368
Hitachi 0388
JVC (Victor) 0168, 0348
Kenwood 0288
Magnavox 0248
Mitsubishi 0268
Onkyo 0128, 0248
Panasonic 0048
Philips 0188, 0248
Pioneer 0208, 0228
Proscan 0308
RCA 0308
Samsung 0148
Sharp 0068
Sony 0028
Technics 0048
Thomson 0328
Toshiba 0088, 0248
Yamaha 0008, 0048, 0188,
0248
Zenith 0248
LD PLAYER
Aiwa 0157
Denon 0147
Disco Vision 0017
Funai 0157
Hitachi (E) 0017
Kenwood 0087, 0107
Magnavox 0027
Marantz 0027
Mitsubishi 0137
NAD 0137
Panasonic 0077, 0177
Philips 0027
Pioneer 0037, 0017, 0137
RCA 0167
Realistic 0157
Sharp 0127
Sony 0047, 0057, 0117
Victor 0097
Yamaha 0007, 0067
CD PLAYER
Acoustic Research 1295
ADC 0025, 0065
Adcom 0205, 0255, 1015
ADS 0265
Aiwa 0295, 0945, 1035,
1055
Akai 0175, 0485, 0535
Alpine 1215, 1305
Audio-Technica 0545
BSR 0245, 0655, 0775
California Audio Lab 0055
Capetronic 1205
Carrera 0245
Carver 0285, 1135
Casio 0345
Crown 0185
Curtis Mathes 0345
Denon 0275, 0875, 0885
Deual (E) 0505
Dynamic Bass (H) 0555
Emerson 0205, 0325, 1105
Eroica 1275
Fisher 0095, 0555, 0925,
1005
Garrard 0365
Genexxa 0305, 0325, 1105
GoldStar 1225, 1265, 1135,
1335
H/K 0105, 0175, 0465,
0995
Hitachi 0195, 0505, 0205,
0815
Inkel 0115, 0395
JVC (Victor) 0315
Kenwood 0045, 0095, 0405,
0585, 0725, 0735,
0745, 0755, 0895
Kyocera 0025
Luxman 0075, 0425, 0675,
0705, 0715, 0985
Magnavox 0165, 0215, 0645,
0955
Marantz 0215, 0235, 0375,
0785, 1345
McIntosh 0355, 1085
MCS 0905, 1315
Memorex 0205, 0225, 0235,
0305, 0325, 1105
MGA 0135
Mission 0215
Mitsubishi 0135, 0445
MTC 1255
NAD 0035, 0615, 0685,
0695
Nakamichi 0125, 0435, 0515
NEC 0255, 0905, 0965
Nikko 0545, 1005
Onkyo 0155, 0455, 0495,
0805, 1155
Optimus 0225, 0245, 0555,
0595, 0845, 0855,
0865, 0895, 0935
Panasonic 0055, 0825, 1095,
1125
Penny 0905
Philips 0165, 0215
Pioneer 0305, 0935, 1045
Proton 0215, 1185
Quasar 0055
RCA 0205, 0915, 1115
Realistic 0205, 0225, 0235,
0325, 0555, 0845
Revox 1175
Rotel 0215
Saba Telecommander (E) 0505
SAE 0215
Samsung 1285
Sansui 0215, 0625, 0975,
1025, 1105
Sanyo 0145, 0555, 0635,
0765
Scott 0325, 1105
Sears 0345
Sharp 0235, 0665, 0895,
1065, 1075
Sherwood 0115, 0235, 0395,
0475
Siements Garrard 1245
Signature 0175
Sontec 1165
Sony 0065, 0565, 0865,
1145
Staron 1235
STS 0025
Sylvania 0215
Symphnoic 0335
Tandy 0305
Tangberg 1195
Teac 0235, 0335, 0385,
0525, 0795, 0835,
1355
Technics 0055, 0605, 1095
Techwood 1325
Telefunken (E) 0505
Thomson (E) 0505
Toshiba 0035, 0685
Vector Research 0065, 1135
Wards 0175
Yamaha 0005, 0015, 0085,
0415, 0545, 0575,
1065
CD-RECORDER/CD-RW
Hitachi 0474
JVC (Victor) 0504
Marantz 0484, 0494
Philips 0444
Pioneer 0454, 0464
Yamaha 0414
MD RECORDER
Pioneer 0424
Sharp 0434
Yamaha 0024, 0394, 0404
TAPE DECK
Aiwa 0094, 0214, 0224
Akai 0184
Carver 0094
Denon 0304
Fisher 0144
Garrard 0194, 0204
JVC (Victor) 0274, 0284, 0294
Kenwood 0124, 0134, 0154,
0234, 0244, 0264
Magnavox 0094
Marantz 0094, 0344
Mitsubishi 0184
Onkyo 0364, 0374
Optimus 0034, 0064, 0204,
0334
Philips 0094
Pioneer 0034, 0044, 0064
Revox 0354
Sansui 0094, 0344
Sharp 0264
Sherwood 0334
Sony 0054, 0084, 0324
Teac 0194, 0254
Technics 0074, 0314
Wards 0034
Yamaha 0004, 0014, 0104,
0114, 0164, 0174,
0264
03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 4/17/1, 1:50 PM3
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia ID V723100-2
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
HTR-5450
HTR-5440
Natural Sound AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
U C A
00HTR5450/5440-cv 3/29/1, 11:27 AM1
*
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
R
L
LR
AUDIO OUT S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
V
V
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
RLRL
DVD player
Main speakers A Main speakers B
RL
Rear speakers
Video signal
Optical signal
Signal flow
Center speaker
Subwoofer
system
Video Monitor
Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source)
L
R
V
Analog signal
(U.S.A. model)
S Video signal
L R
S
S
O
O
S
*
RX-V520/RX-V520RDS
HTR-5450/HTR-5450RDS only
*
V728210 RX-V520/RX-V420 (ML)
SLEEP
TEST
A/B/C/D/E
MUTE
VOLUME
–/+
POWER
TIME/LEVEL
Quick Reference Card
DISPLAY (MD)
SLEEP
EFFECT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
POWER
REC/PAUSE
PLAY
DIR A (TAPE)
SKIP– (MD)
REWIND (TAPE)
SEARCH (MD)
PAUSE (MD)
DECK A/B (TAPE)
DIR B (TAPE)
SKIP+ (MD)
STOP
FAST FORWARD (TAPE)
SEARCH (MD)
TAPE/MD
DISPLAY
SLEEP
EFFECT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
POWER
PLAY
SKIP–
SEARCH
PAUSE
TV INPUT
SKIP+
STOP
SEARCH
CD
DISC SKIP–/+
DVD/LD
DISPLAY
SLEEP
EFFECT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
POWER
PLAY
SKIP–
SEARCH
PAUSE
TV INPUT
SKIP+
STOP
SEARCH
DISC SKIP–/+
V728130
SET
MENU
EFFECT
6CH INPUT
PRESET–/+
TV VOLUME
PRG+,
PRG–
Input selector
buttons
TV INPUT
AMP(TUNER)
6CH INPUT
Input selector
buttons
6CH INPUT
Input selector
buttons
6CH INPUT
Input selector
buttons
V520(Q)_Quick 2/1/1, 1:37 PM1
Quick Reference Card
RETURN
TITLE
CLEAR
INDEX
+10
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
DISC SKIP/+
POWER
Numeric buttons
TV INPUT
DVD MENU
MENU SELECT
MENU LEFT
MENU RIGHT
MENU DOWN
MENU
MENU UP
CHANNEL
CBL/SAT
CHANNEL/+
DISPLAY
TV SLEEP
+100
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
CBL/SAT
POWER
MENU SELECT
MENU LEFT
RECALL
MENU UP
TV INPUT
MENU RIGHT
MENU DOWN
MENU
CBL/SAT
CHANNEL
ENTER
VCR REC
TV
DISPLAY
TV SLEEP
EFFECT
TV MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV
POWER
VCR PLAY
VCR
REWIND
CHANNEL
VCR
PAUSE
TV INPUT
VCR STOP
VCR FAST
FORWARD
TV
CHANNEL/+
CHANNEL
ENTER
*1
DISPLAY
TV SLEEP
EFFECT
CHANNEL
ENTER
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
VCR
POWER
VCR PLAY
VCR
REWIND
CHANNEL
VCR
PAUSE
TV INPUT
VCR STOP
VCR FAST
FORWARD
VCR
CHANNEL/+
VCR
VCR REC
*1
Press this button twice to start recording.
Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement.
Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten.
Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in.
V728130
*1 Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.
Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.
Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.
V520(Q)_Quick 2/1/1, 1:38 PM2

Transcripción de documentos

UCA HTR-5450 HTR-5440 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00HTR5450/5440-cv 1 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia ID V723100-1 3/29/1, 11:27 AM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • 9 10 Explanation of Graphical Symbols 11 The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 12 13 14 WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. 6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 15 1 16 17 18 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. ICAUTION CAUTION 0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 2 3/28/1, 4:47 PM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 19 MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE PREPARATION Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING INTRODUCTION For US customers only: Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. APPENDIX We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. English YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. CAUTION CAUTION II 0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 3 3/28/1, 4:47 PM ADVANCED OPERATION 3. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. BASIC OPERATION 2. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/ or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. CAUTION III CAUTION 0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 4 3/28/1, 4:47 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents ............................. 3 Battery Installation in the Remote Control ............ 3 Battery Replacement .............................................. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................... 4 4 6 7 8 9 SET MENU ......................................................... 32 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .............. 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .......... 2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ...... 3 I/O ASSIGN ...................................................... 4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................. 5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................. 6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ............................... 7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) ............................ 8 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ...................... 32 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 36 36 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................. Remote Control ...................................................... Using the Remote Control ...................................... Display ................................................................... Rear Panel .............................................................. INTRODUCTION FEATURES .......................................................... 2 GETTING STARTED ......................................... 3 DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .......................................................... 37 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................ 10 Speakers to Be Used ............................................ 10 Speaker Placement ............................................... 10 CONNECTIONS ............................................... 11 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE .... 19 Before You Start Adjusting .................................. 19 Using the Test Tone .............................................. 19 SLEEP TIMER .................................................. 39 Setting the SLEEP Timer ..................................... 39 Canceling the SLEEP Timer ................................ 39 PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ...................... 40 Component Selector Buttons ............................... Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit .......................................................... Description of Each Mode ................................... Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................ Returning to the Factory Setting .......................... BASIC OPERATION Before Connecting Components ........................... 11 Connecting Audio Components ........................... 12 Connecting an External Decoder ......................... 12 Connecting Video Components ............................ 14 Connecting Speakers ............................................ 16 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ..................... 18 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ................... 18 Delay Time ........................................................... 37 Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer .......... 37 Adjusting Method ................................................ 38 40 40 41 45 46 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................ 47 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................ 47 CINEMA DSP Programs ...................................... 47 PLAYING A SOURCE ...................................... 21 Input Modes and Indications ................................ 23 Selecting a DSP Program ..................................... 24 Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) ....................... 25 TUNING ............................................................. 26 26 27 27 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 50 SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5450) ...................... 54 SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5440) ...................... 55 GLOSSARY ....................................................... 56 INDEX ................................................................ 58 28 29 29 30 APPENDIX Connecting the Antennas ..................................... Automatic Tuning ................................................ Manual Tuning ..................................................... Automatic Preset Tuning (for FM stations only) ...................................... Manual Preset Tuning .......................................... To Recall a Preset Station .................................... Exchanging Preset Stations .................................. ADVANCED OPERATION BASIC OPERATION RECORDING A SOURCE ............................... 31 English 1 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 1 3/28/1, 4:47 PM FEATURES 5-Channel Power Amplification ◆ Minimum RMS Output (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) HTR-5450 [U.S.A. and Canada models] Main: 80 W + 80 W (8 Ω) Center: 80 W (8 Ω) Rear: 80 W + 80 W (8 Ω) [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) Center: 70 W (8 Ω) Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) HTR-5440 Main: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω) Center: 65 W (8 Ω) Rear: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω) ◆ Maximum Power (EIAJ) (10% THD, 1 kHz) HTR-5450 [China and General models] Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) Center: 100 W (8 Ω) Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) HTR-5440 [China and General models] Main: 95 W + 95 W (8 Ω) Center: 95 W (8 Ω) Rear: 95 W + 95 W (8 Ω) Multi-mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ DTS Decoder Dolby Pro Logic Decoder Dolby Digital Decoder Hi-Fi DSP CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ◆ Automatic Preset Tuning ◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) Other Features ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter HTR-5450 only ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 9 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ Video Signal Input and Output Capability (Including S Video Connections HTR-5450 only ) ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Signal Input Jacks ◆ SLEEP Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes • This document is the Owner’s Manual for both the HTR-5450 and HTR-5440. For details on various functions unique to each model, see the descriptions given for each model name. Illustrations for the HTR-5450 are used for common functions. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 2 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 2 3/28/1, 4:47 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check that the following items are included in your package. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) (Australia and Singapore models) Connection guide BASIC OPERATION Battery Replacement If the remote control operates only when it is close to the unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with new ones. Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes. If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for the remote control will return to the factory settings. 2 Notes 1 Turn the remote control over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. 2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Close the battery compartment cover. English 1 3 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3 APPENDIX 3 • Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement. • Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) • Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an extended period of time. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. ADVANCED OPERATION Battery Installation in the Remote Control Quick reference card PREPARATION Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China and General models) AM loop antenna 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel HTR-5450 1 3 2 4 5 6 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L ON R TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO SILENT 7 8 qw 0 9 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX e t yu i r op a HTR-5440 1 3 2 4 5 6 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B PROGRAM EFFECT PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L ON R TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT 7 8 0 9 qw e VIDEO L AUDIO R VIDEO AUX r t yu i op a 1 STANDBY/ON 2 Remote control sensor Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on, set the volume at the minimum level. This receives signals from the remote control. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 3 Display This shows various information. 4 INPUT MODE Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO, DTS and ANALOG for the sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit. 4 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 4 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS r VIDEO AUX jacks Turn this control to turn up or down the volume. Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a game console or camcorder to these jacks. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. 6 6CH INPUT Press this button to select the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 7 BASS Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the low-frequency response. 8 TREBLE Note • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. 9 BALANCE 0 SPEAKERS A/B q PROGRAM l / h Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the selected program appears on the display. w EFFECT u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display and switch the function between for storing a broadcasting station (preset tuning) and for tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. i MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to begin automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only). o TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. p FM/AM Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. a INPUT l / h Press these buttons to select the input source (DVD, AUX, MD/CD-R, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL) that you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected input source appears on the display. APPENDIX Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). If you turn them off, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the right and left main speakers. In that case, the output levels of the right and left speakers may not match. Press this button to select one of 5 preset station groups (A to E). ADVANCED OPERATION Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use. Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker system that you don’t want to use. y A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERATION This control is only effective for the sound from the main speakers. Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. When “ z ” appears on the display: This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8). Press l to select a lower and h to select a higher preset station number. When “ z ” goes off from the display: This button is used for tuning. Press l to tune in to lower frequencies, and h to tune in to higher frequencies. PREPARATION Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the high-frequency response. t PRESET/TUNING l / h INTRODUCTION 5 VOLUME e PHONES jack Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack so that this unit outputs audio signals for private listening. When listening with headphones privately, set both SPEAKERS A/B to the OFF position. English 5 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 5 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes basic operation of this unit with the remote control. First, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL” for full details. 3 POWER Each time you press this button, the unit switches between the power on and standby mode. 4 TEST Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker. 1 5 A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+ Press AMP(TUNER). 2 These buttons are used to select a preset station. A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset stations PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8) 3 6 MUTE Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this button again. q w e 4 7 VOLUME These buttons are used to adjust the volume level. u: To turn up the volume d: To turn down the volume 8 SLEEP 5 Press this button to set the SLEEP timer. 9 –/+ 6 TV VOLUME 7 These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and TIME/LEVEL mode. 0 TIME/LEVEL 8 TV INPUT 9 Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL mode. q Input selector buttons r 0 t 1 Indicator This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote control. If it flashes rapidly several times, press the selected button again. These buttons select the input source. CD: To play a CD TUNER: To listen to an FM or AM broadcast MD/CD-R: To play an MD or CD recorder (or tape deck) DVD: To play a DVD D-TV/CBL: To watch a TV/digital TV or cable TV VCR: To play a video cassette AUX: To use another audio component V-AUX: To use another audio/video component w 6CH INPUT Press this button to play a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 2 Component selector buttons Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to control with the remote control. (The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to “Setting the Manufacturer Code”.) When the component selector button has been pressed, the remote control is set to that component operation mode. 6 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 6 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS e EFFECT Using the Remote Control Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). r PRG+, PRG– Remote control sensor t SET MENU INTRODUCTION Press these buttons to select a DSP program. Once you press SET MENU, these buttons are used for selecting the SET MENU item. (HTR-5450) Press this button to select the items in the SET MENU. Within approximately 6 m (20 feet) ADVANCED OPERATION Handle the remote control with care. Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control. Do not drop the remote control. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – extremely low temperature. BASIC OPERATION Notes • • • • PREPARATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a large object between the remote control and the sensor, the sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe light). In this case, change the direction of the light or reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting. APPENDIX English 7 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 7 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Display 1 2 5 6 4 3 VIRTUAL DOLBY DTS DIGITAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC ENHANCED MONO TV SPORTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO 5CH STEREO CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT BASS EXT. MEMORY GAME AUTO STEREO TUNED SLEEP DSP PCM 7 dB ms SP AB 8 K HZ 0 9 q w e 1 t indicator 8 v indicator The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is turned on. This lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 2 VIRTUAL indicator 9 Headphones indicator This lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP. This lights up when headphones are connected. 3 g and o indicators 0 Multi-information display “ g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the selected source are encoded with Dolby Digital. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. This display shows various information: for example the name of the selected input source and the various settings during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner is selected as the input source. 4 DSP program indicators This indicates the name of the selected DSP program. q MEMORY indicator 5 AUTO indicator This flashes for about 5 seconds after pressing MEMORY. During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the memory. This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning mode. w TUNED indicator 6 STEREO indicator This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is being received. This lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. e SLEEP indicator This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on. 7 x indicator “ x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. 8 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 8 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel HTR-5450 1 2 3 4 R TUNER AM ANT GND + SPEAKERS – – + 8 INTRODUCTION DIGITAL INPUT CD 7 6 5 L FM ANT A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L DVD CENTER D-TV/CBL B VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT SET BEFORE POWER ON MD/CD-R CENTER MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR R (SURROUND) L S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER + OPTICAL MD/CD-R AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR VIDEO MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 :6 :6 CENTER REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER PREPARATION L – R DIGITAL OUTPUT AUX IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R CD 9 IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT VCR 1 As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. 0 (U.S.A. model) q HTR-5440 4 DIGITAL INPUT CD 6 5 R TUNER AM ANT GND + – SPEAKERS 7 – + 8 BASIC OPERATION 2 3 L FM ANT A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT B MONITOR OUT SET BEFORE POWER ON CENTER R SUB WOOFER + MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 REAR :8 REAR R (SURROUND) L MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 :6 :6 CENTER REAR L MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER ADVANCED OPERATION R AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR VIDEO MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER – R AUX CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R 9 IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT VCR 1 SUB WOOFER OUTPUT As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. 0 (U.S.A. model) 9 Audio component jacks See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. 0 SUBWOOFER jack See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. See page 17 for connection information. 4 Antenna input terminals q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch See page 26 for connection information. Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch (see page 18). 5 Video component jacks See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. 6 Speaker terminals 7 AC power cord Connect to a power outlet. 8 AC OUTLET(S) China and General models only FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 26. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 18. Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video components (see page 18). 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 9 English See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. APPENDIX 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks HTR-5450 only 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 3 6CH INPUT jacks q 9 3/28/1, 4:47 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacture to ensure even tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use highperformance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the sound will be heard from the right and left main speakers. In that case, “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION Please use magnetically shielded speakers. Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected even when magnetically shielded speakers are used. Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens. 10 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 10 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONNECTIONS INTRODUCTION Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later. The input and output jacks for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows: video signals (composite) V V White analog audio signals for the left channel L L Red analog audio signals for the right channel R R coaxial digital signals C C BASIC OPERATION Yellow PREPARATION When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect it to the jacks with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 11 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 11 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. y • You can designate the input for each digital jack according to your component by using “3 I/O ASSIGN” in the SET MENU. • HTR-5450 only All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. • HTR-5440 only When making connections between the digital signal jacks, you should connect the components to the same-named analog audio signal jacks of this unit, because a digital signal cannot be recorded by a recording component connected to this unit. • All digital signal input jacks are applicable to sampling frequencies of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has coaxial digital output jack. • When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD recorder or tape deck y • HTR-5450 only When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. • HTR-5440 only Connect the analog input/output jack of your recording component to the AUDIO jacks. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • HTR-5450 only Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital jack. Connecting an External Decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items of “1 SPEAKER SET” in the SET MENU is not affected (except “MAIN LVL”). 12 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 12 3/28/1, 4:48 PM CONNECTIONS SUBWOOFER OUTPUT MAIN OUTPUT OUTPUT External decoder CD player INTRODUCTION COAXIAL OUTPUT L C R L R R L CENTER OUTPUT SURROUND OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT CD TUNER AM ANT GND 75 PREPARATION COAXIAL FM ANT UNBAL. OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R L AUX CD R OUTPUT IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL O OUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT VCR 1 L R L OUTPUT MD recorder or CD recorder ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL INPUT O R INPUT Audio component BASIC OPERATION DIGITAL OUTPUT (HTR-5450/U.S.A. model) IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R OPTICAL OUTPUT indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX L English 13 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 13 3/28/1, 4:48 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Video Components ■ Audio signal jacks Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ Video signal jacks Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ S VIDEO jacks HTR-5450 only Video monitor DVD player S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO IN If your video component has “S” (high-resolution) video jacks, they can be connected to this unit’s S VIDEO jacks. Otherwise, connect the composite video jacks of your video component to this unit’s composite video jacks. Notes S • Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S VIDEO connection. • If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and composite input jacks, the signals will be directed to their respective output jacks. S DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO S VIDEO S S S S S Video signal Signal flow S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT TV/digital TV, cable TV or satellite tuner S VIDEO IN VCR ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console or camcorder to this unit. HTR-5450 S VIDEO VIDEO L HTR-5440 AUDIO R VIDEO OPTICAL V L AUDIO R VIDEO AUX VIDEO AUX S L R V O L R OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT Game console or camcorder 14 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 14 3/28/1, 4:48 PM Game console or camcorder CONNECTIONS Video monitor OPTICAL OUTPUT DVD player S VIDEO OUTPUT L R VIDEO OUTPUT S VIDEO INPUT V S DIGITAL INPUT CD INTRODUCTION AUDIO OUTPUT O VIDEO INPUT V S TUNER AM ANT GND COAXIAL FM ANT 75 UNBAL. D-TV/CBL (HTR-5450/U.S.A. model) 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L CENTER SURROUND L DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER OPTICAL MD/CD-R PREPARATION OPTICAL L R O IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R CD S IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL V L R L VIDEO S VIDEO OUTPUT OUTPUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT R L AUDIO INPUT TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner R S S S VIDEO OUTPUT V VCR AUDIO OUTPUT V S VIDEO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL OUTPUT OUT VCR 1 BASIC OPERATION AUX DIGITAL OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables S indicates S-video cables HTR-5450 only 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 15 3/28/1, 4:48 PM English 15 APPENDIX When using an LD player Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack. If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks, connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack. If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog input jack (D-TV/CBL or VCR 1). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD player. Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for the DVD/LD mode. CONNECTIONS Connecting Speakers Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. ■ Speaker cables 1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 2 ■ Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 1 3 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. y (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug ■ Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 3 2 1 2 Open the tab. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. y (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, open the tab and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. ■ Main speaker terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. ■ Rear speaker terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ Center speaker terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 16 3/28/1, 4:48 PM CONNECTIONS Main speakers A Main speakers B R + – SPEAKERS – + Right INTRODUCTION Left Right Left (HTR-5450/U.S.A. model) L A MAIN PREPARATION B IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON CENTER MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR REAR R (SURROUND) L + AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR – SUB WOOFER OUTPUT Subwoofer system Center speaker BASIC OPERATION Right Left Rear speakers ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Subwoofer connection When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. APPENDIX Notes • Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operation instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.) • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “LFE LEVEL (5 DOLBY D. SET)” and “6 DTS SET” in the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. English 17 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 17 3/28/1, 4:48 PM CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. (HTR-5450/General model) Switch Speaker position IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. [Canada model only] The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Left AC OUTLETS SWITCHED IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER Right Impedance level ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Connecting the Power Supply Cords After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) (HTR-5450/U.S.A. model) MAINS AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR To AC outlet U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models ................................................. 2 OUTLETS Australia model ................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W (50 W for China and General models). SWITCHED 18 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 18 3/28/1, 4:48 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE Using the Test Tone The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should be performed at your listening position with the remote control. 3 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. Note • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. PREPARATION 5 2,6 Before You Start Adjusting 2 1 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. 2 Press TEST. “TEST LEFT” appears on the display. 3 Turn up the volume. You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each speaker for about two seconds in following order: left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes as shown below. VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 4 3 Set the volume at the minimum level. 2 Turn the power on. VOLUME TEST LEFT STANDBY /ON 3 TEST CENTER Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A ON B OFF Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the center position. BASS – TREBLE + – + BALANCE L R TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR. Notes APPENDIX 4 TEST RIGHT ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. • If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the setting of “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU. English 19 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 19 3/28/1, 4:48 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE 4 Adjust BALANCE on the front panel so that the sound output level of the right main speaker and the left main speaker is the same. BALANCE L R Front panel 5 Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the speaker currently outputting the test tone so that it becomes almost the same as that of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. 6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. The test tone stops. Notes • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 5. The center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 37. • After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual source. Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 37. y • Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME (or VOLUME (u/d)). • If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting “MAIN LVL” in the SET MENU to “–10 dB”. 20 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 20 3/28/1, 4:48 PM BASIC OPERATION PLAYING A SOURCE 2 4 1,6 Select the desired input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on the video monitor for video sources.) The name of the selected input source appears on the display. VOLUME D I G I T A L INPUT INTRODUCTION When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON or INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E Front panel EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF Remote control MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION SILENT L VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 3 6 7 4 Input source 2 6CH INPUT 7 4 or Front panel 1 Turn the power on. or • An audio source can not be played if “6CH INPUT” appears. Press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT”. • If you select and play a video source when “6CH INPUT” appears, the playback result will be a video image from the video source and the sound from the audio source selected by using “6CH INPUT”. y Front panel Remote control • The current input mode is also shown. Refer to “Input Modes and Indications” on page 23 for details. SPEAKERS A ON B APPENDIX Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. ADVANCED OPERATION Notes STANDBY /ON 3 Remote control VOLUME Set the volume at the minimum level. Front panel 2 BASIC OPERATION To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” appears on the display. 6 OFF Front panel English 21 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 21 3/28/1, 4:48 PM PLAYING A SOURCE 5 Play the source. Refer to the instructions for the source component (and “TUNING” for details). Note • When controlling an audio/video component (MD recorder, CD player, DVD player, tape deck, etc.) with the remote control, press one of the component selector buttons, (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/ LD, etc.), which corresponds to the component you want to control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL”. 6 ■ Notes on the digital signal HTR-5450 only The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: 1. The following indication will appear on the display. Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME PCM K HZ or Front panel Remote control If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc. These controls are only effective for the sound from the main speakers. • BASS controls the low-frequency response. • TREBLE controls the high-frequency response. • BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers. BASS 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. Note • If “MAIN SP” in the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” is set to SWFR or “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. 3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on page 37 cannot be made (except the level of the subwoofer) BALANCE TREBLE ■ BGV (background video) function – + + – L R Front panel 7 Use the digital sound field processor. Refer to “Selecting a DSP Program”. The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled with the remote control. Play a video source, and then select an audio source with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the audio source with INPUT l / h on the front panel. PROGRAM or Remote control Front panel ■ To mute the sound Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output. Press MUTE on the remote control. To restore the audio output to the previous volume level, press MUTE again. Note • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to set this unit in the standby mode. 22 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 22 3/28/1, 4:48 PM PLAYING A SOURCE Input Modes and Indications When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. INPUT MODE or Front panel Remote control AUTO: ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG (ANLG): In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. BASIC OPERATION Input mode PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the display. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • The following phenomena may occur if the input mode is set to AUTO when playing back a source encoded with DTS: – If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit automatically switches to the “DTSdecoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the display.) The “t” indicator may flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.) If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed. If this status continues for a certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with a DTS signal Notes APPENDIX • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is selected. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and DVD players in the following situation: When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback is resumed. • Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG. English 23 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 23 3/28/1, 4:48 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ On the front panel Selecting a DSP Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. Refer to “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” for details about each program. VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE y TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT • Make sure that the sound effect is turned on (see page 25). MEMORY – + – + L R ON OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES ■ On the remote control S VIDEO SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) PROGRAM 1 / Press PROGRAM l or h repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears for a moment and the selected DSP program indicator lights up on the display. 2 1 TUNING MODE Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. DIGITAL PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 BASS EXT. DSP 2 Press PRG+ or PRG– repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears for a moment and the selected DSP program indicator lights up on the display. DIGITAL DSP program name y • If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each speaker. (Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 37 for details.) Notes MOVIE THEATER 1 BASS EXT. DSP DSP program name • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • HTR-5450 only When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. 24 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 24 3/28/1, 4:48 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and monitor only the main sound. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. EFFECT or The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by setting “REAR LR SP” on the SET MENU to NON. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by using the main speakers. Front panel Remote control Notes – HTR-5450 only when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of the DSP program while using headphones. This feature delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening through the speakers. BASIC OPERATION • If the sound effect is canceled when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not output normally, depending on the source. In that case, turn back on the sound effect. PREPARATION Note • This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “REAR LR SP” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played; – when using the test tone; – when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT CINEMA); or INTRODUCTION Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using YAMAHA original technology, natural surround reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual speaker. Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) ADVANCED OPERATION You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers are on. APPENDIX English 25 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 25 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models only) FREQUENCY Because the interstation frequency spacing STEP differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in FM/AM your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/ 10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. 50KHZ /9KHZ ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 3 1 4 2 100KHZ /10KHZ AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) TUNER AM ANT GND FM ANT 75 5 Antenna stand 1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal hole. 2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 4 5 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. UNBAL. (U.S.A. model) y • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. terminal. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. Note • Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. 26 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 26 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING Automatic Tuning Manual Tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. Use INPUT l / h to select TUNER as input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. VOLUME INPUT D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R INTRODUCTION 1 OPTICAL FM/AM SILENT or VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 1 Use INPUT l / h to select TUNER as the input source. 32 1 3 INPUT Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. TUNING MODE Goes off AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. or EDIT 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. TUNING MODE Turn “ z ” off 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to tune in to the desired station. To continue the tuning search, hold down the button. PRESET/TUNING Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note • If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality. PRESET /TUNING EDIT Turn “ z ” off APPENDIX Press PRESET/TUNING l once to tune in to a lower frequency and h once to tune in to a higher frequency. Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. ADVANCED OPERATION If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. 4 BASIC OPERATION PRESET /TUNING FM/AM PREPARATION 4 PRESET/TUNING y English • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak). • When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the display. 27 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 27 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options Automatic Preset Tuning (for FM stations only) You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function for FM stations only. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially store up to 40 FM stations (5 groups x 8 stations). VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT ■ When automatic preset tuning is completed FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. (HTR-5450) 3 21 1 You can select the preset number from which the unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3), 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l or h to select the preset number with which the first station will be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Press FM/AM to select the FM band. Notes FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Hold down MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for about 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ... A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. MEMORY • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply using the manual preset tuning method. • Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning is automatically ended after searching for all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store it by using the manual preset tuning method. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again by using preset tuning methods. AUTO BASS EXT. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 28 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 28 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING Manual Preset Tuning To Recall a Preset Station You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations) manually. SURROUND INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT You can also recall a preset station with the remote control. Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector and press TUNER on the input selector. FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF VOLUME MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R D I G I T A L OPTICAL D I G I TA L SILENT SURROUND STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS 4 3 2,5 BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT Tune in to the desired station. Refer to “Automatic/Manual Tuning” for the tuning procedure. L AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION 2 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B PHONES 1 INTRODUCTION VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number with which it was stored. VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 2 1 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the desired group (A to E) of preset stations before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The selected group appears on the display. 1 2 1 A/B/C/D/E Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group of preset stations. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) with which you want to store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Press l to select a lower preset station number and h to select a higher preset station number. PRESET/TUNING 5 Front panel 2 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l or h (or PRESET –/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the display along with the reception band, frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. PRESET/TUNING or Front panel APPENDIX Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. The displayed station has been stored as the preset group and number you have selected, and the reception band and frequency appear and the “TUNED” indicator lights up on the display. or Remote control AUTO STEREO MEMORY ADVANCED OPERATION A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERATION Flashes TUNED AUTO STEREO MAN'L/AUTO FM 6 TUNED Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. English Notes • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. 29 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 29 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING Exchanging Preset Stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Example: Exchange preset station “E1” with “A5” VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 2,4 1 Recall preset station “E1”. Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. 2 Hold down (PRESET/ TUNING) EDIT for about 3 second. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. PRESET /TUNING EDIT BASS EXT. MEMORY Flashes 3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons on the front panel. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. BASS EXT. MEMORY Flashes 4 Press (PRESET/TUNING) EDIT again. The display shows the exchange of stations has been completed. PRESET /TUNING EDIT MEMORY 30 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 30 3/28/1, 4:49 PM RECORDING A SOURCE 1,4 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 4 2 If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. VOLUME Set the volume at the minimum level. HTR-5450 only Front panel Select the source you want to record. INPUT or Front panel Remote control Begin recording by the recording component connected to this unit. 4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to confirm the input source. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded. Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are output from the player’s analog outputs. APPENDIX 3 The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. VOLUME or Front panel ADVANCED OPERATION 2 ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software BASIC OPERATION 1 • HTR-5450 only Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only and an S video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. PREPARATION (HTR-5450) Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording component. Refer to the instructions for these components. Remote control English 31 0106HTR5450/5440_31_EN 31 3/28/1, 4:49 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker mode setting. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum audio/video playback for your system. 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. y 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 3 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly to select the item (1 to 9) you want to adjust. • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. 1 SPEAKER SET CENTER SP MAIN SP REAR LR SP BASS OUT MAIN LVL 2 HP TONE CTRL 3 I/O ASSIGN 4 INPUT MODE y 5 DOLBY D. SET • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing PRG–. LFE LEVEL 4 D-RANGE 6 DTS SET 7 SP DLY TIME 8 DISPLAY SET 9 MEM. GUARD Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the display. Depending on the item, press PRG– (or PRG+) to select a sub item. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. 1 3,6 5 Press – or + repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 6 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly until the input source name appears to exit from the SET MENU. 4,5 2 Note • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 32 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 32 3/28/1, 4:49 PM SET MENU 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Notes LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. Note • When you select MAIN for “BASS OUT”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. ■ REAR LR SP (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) Initial setting: LRG ■ CENTER SP (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. y • This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NON for “REAR LR SP”. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the left and right main speakers. APPENDIX SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. BASIC OPERATION • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items of “1 SPEAKER SET” are not affected (except “MAIN LVL”). • HTR-5450 only When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN LVL” are possible, but those in items “CENTER SP” and “REAR LR SP” are not affected. Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE PREPARATION Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. ■ MAIN SP (main speaker mode) INTRODUCTION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items again. English 33 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 33 3/28/1, 4:49 PM SET MENU ■ BASS OUT (bass out mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH 2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): –6 to +3 Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) dB SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. Notes • When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette etc.), select BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack. • When you select SMALL (SML) for items “CENTER SP”, “MAIN SP” and “REAR LR SP”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and output to the subwoofer. dB 3 I/O ASSIGN It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s DIGITAL jack settings (component names for terminals) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). HTR-5450 ■ 3A (1) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT jack) Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R ■ MAIN LVL (main level mode) Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: NORM (normal), –10 dB Initial setting: NORM ■ 3B (2) to (4) (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL NORM (normal) Normally select this setting. –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. 34 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 34 3/28/1, 4:49 PM SET MENU ■ 3C (5) (for the COAXIAL INPUT jack) 5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. Initial setting: (5) CD Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. HTR-5440 Control value (dB): –20 to 0 Initial setting: 0 dB dB Initial settings: (1) DVD (2) D-TV/CBL Notes • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. • Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at home. PREPARATION ■ 3A (1) and (2) (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. INTRODUCTION ■ LFE LEVEL HTR-5440 Initial setting: (3) CD ■ D-RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds). Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN Initial setting: MAX BASIC OPERATION ■ 3B (3) (for the COAXIAL INPUT jack) Note 4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low volume level. MAX Output level Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning on the power of this unit with the source component connected to more than one type of input jacks. Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO Dialog level APPENDIX Input level MIN Output level AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Dialog level H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 1.0 1.0 Output level STD Dialog level English 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input level Input level Note • When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD. 35 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 35 3/28/1, 4:49 PM ADVANCED OPERATION • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. SET MENU 6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) 8 DISPLAY SET This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the display. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range : –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 Control range (dB): –10 to +10 Initial setting: 0 dB 9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) dB Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to the setting of the SET MENU and other settings on this unit. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. 7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right main speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialog. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF Select ON to protect the following features: • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels • Delay time adjusted by using TIME/LEVEL Notes • When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. Control range (ms): 0 to 5 Initial setting: 0 ms ms Center speaker image C L C R RR RL y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of the center speaker. 36 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 36 3/28/1, 4:50 PM DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Delay Time Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. 5. 6. 7. 9. Speaker Center Right rear Left rear Subwoofer Preset value (dB) 0 0 0 0 APPENDIX Preset value (ms) 45 30 15 26 2 36 10 69 23 13 13 20 16 16 20 15 15 20 15 15 20 5 5 20 5 5 • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because the center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be the same for all DSP programs. ADVANCED OPERATION 8. Program CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT DISCO 5CH STEREO GAME TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL PRO LOGIC/NORMAL DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED Notes BASIC OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each speaker even if it has already been adjusted in “ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” procedure. PREPARATION You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer INTRODUCTION When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you wish. English 37 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 37 3/28/1, 4:50 PM DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Adjusting Method 3 Press – or + to adjust the delay time or speaker output levels. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of any other item. Adjustments should be performed with the remote control while watching the information on the display. 1 Notes 3 2 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. 2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item changes and appears on the display as below. DELAY CENTER Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/ subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time and output levels again. Delay time Center speaker output level R SUR. Right rear speaker output level L SUR. Left rear speaker output level SWFR • If “CENTER SP” or “REAR LR SP” is set to NON, or “BASS OUT” is set to MAIN, the output level of that speaker cannot be adjusted. • When you adjust the output level with TIME/LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting procedure using test tones on page 19 is recommended. Subwoofer output level Note • Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able to select all these items. 38 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 38 3/28/1, 4:50 PM SLEEP TIMER Notes • First press AMP(TUNER), TAPE/MD, CD or DVD/LD on the component selector to set the SLEEP timer for this unit. • The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Canceling the SLEEP Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will go off. Play a source you want to enjoy when you are going to sleep. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to select the desired SLEEP time. Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time will change as below: 120 90 60 BASIC OPERATION 1 • The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the standby mode by using POWER on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC power outlet. 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (This is the state before SLEEP is pressed.) ADVANCED OPERATION BASS EXT. SLEEP Flashes 3 PREPARATION Note Setting the SLEEP Timer INTRODUCTION The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the remote control. The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the display after the SLEEP timer has been set. The display returns to the previous indication. STEREO TUNED SLEEP APPENDIX Lights up English 39 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 39 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component). Note • For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual. Component Selector Buttons There are eight component selector buttons. Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to control with the remote control. For example, if you press CD on the component selector, the remote control is set to the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled. AMP(TUNER) You can perform the basic operations of this unit. CD The code for a YAMAHA CD player is factory set. DVD/LD & DVD MENU An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD mode. A DVD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is factory set. TAPE/MD The code for a YAMAHA MD deck is factory set. (The code for the YAMAHA CD recorder and tape deck can also be set.) VCR A VCR can be controlled. TV A TV can be controlled. CBL/SAT A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled. Notes • The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the operation mode. Refer to the following pages for details. • When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 49 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code. Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit 3 Turn on the power. 4 Press CD on the input selector. 5 Press CD on the component selector. 6 Press p. Refer to “Description of Each Mode” for the CD player operation buttons. 7 Adjust the volume. ■ Example: To control YAMAHA CD player 5 2 3 4 7 6 1 Make sure that the volume is set at the minimum level. 2 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes listed from page i at the end of this manual, you can control other brands of components. Refer to “Setting the Manufacturer Code” for details. 40 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 40 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Description of Each Mode ■ TAPE/MD MODE INTRODUCTION Note • TV VOLUME functions if you have set the code for your TV. Press TAPE/MD. PREPARATION POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder. This button turns on the tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons BASIC OPERATION 6CH INPUT EFFECT VOLUME MUTE DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 41 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 41 3/28/1, 4:50 PM APPENDIX DECK A/B (TAPE) This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette tape deck. e PAUSE (MD/CD-R) This button gives a pause in operation. a DIR B (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck B. SKIP+ (MD/CD-R) This button skips to the next track. s STOP This button stops operation on a tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder. f FAST FORWARD (TAPE) This button winds a tape fast forward. SEARCH (MD/CD-R) This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. ADVANCED OPERATION SLEEP r REC/PAUSE This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck or MD recorder. p PLAY This button plays a tape, an MD or CD-R. b DIR A (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck A. SKIP– (MD/CD-R) This button skips to the previous track. w REWIND (TAPE) This button rewinds a tape. SEARCH (MD/CD-R) This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. TV VOLUME PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ CD MODE Note • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. Press CD. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA CD player. This button turns on the CD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD changer) These buttons skip to the next or previous CD. VOLUME MUTE y TV VOLUME PAUSE/STOP function Press the button once to give a pause in operation and press once more to stop operation. SLEEP p PLAY This button plays a CD. b SKIP– This button skips to the beginning of the previous track. w SEARCH This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. DISPLAY TV INPUT e PAUSE This button gives a pause in operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting. a SKIP+ This button skips to the beginning of the next track. s STOP This button stops operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD players. f SEARCH This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 42 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 42 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ DVD/LD MODE Note • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. INTRODUCTION Press DVD/LD. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD player. This button turns on the DVD or LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT DISC SKIP –/+ PREPARATION VOLUME MUTE SLEEP PAUSE SKIP – STOP TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT SKIP + PLAY SEARCH SEARCH BASIC OPERATION ■ DVD MENU MODE Notes • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD player. This button turns on the DVD or LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. ADVANCED OPERATION Press DVD MENU. Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP –/+ VOLUME MUTE RETURN MENU LEFT MENU DOWN INDEX APPENDIX MENU UP TV VOLUME TV INPUT MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT MENU TITLE English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 43 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 43 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ VCR MODE ■ CBL/SAT MODE Note Note • TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have set the code for your TV. VCR POWER Press VCR. • TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have set the code for your TV. CBL/SAT POWER Press CBL/SAT. CHANNEL EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER VCR CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME MUTE TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE TV SLEEP VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. CHANNEL CBL/SAT CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME MUTE TV SLEEP MENU UP MENU LEFT VCR PLAY VCR FAST FORWARD VCR STOP VCR REWIND MENU DOWN +100 CHANNEL ENTER TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT MENU RECALL ■ TV MODE Note • You can control your VCR if you have set the code for it. TV POWER Press TV. CHANNEL TV CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME TV MUTE TV SLEEP VCR REC Press this button twice. VCR STOP VCR REWIND EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE VCR PLAY VCR FAST FORWARD • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 44 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 44 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Setting the Manufacturer Code 1 2 Turn on your component to be used. Press one of the component selector buttons which corresponds to the component to be controlled. You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT and DVD MENU modes if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or DVD player is not being used. Note • In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU mode, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD mode. 1 2 Turn on the VCR to be used. Press CBL/SAT or DVD MENU on the component selector. Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (and third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If your component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. 5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 BASIC OPERATION Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. PREPARATION 3 INTRODUCTION You can set the code for the manufacturer of your component after pressing the component selector buttons other than AMP(TUNER). ■ To use a second (and third) VCR Notes APPENDIX • You can set only one code for one mode. • In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes: Be sure to press DVD/LD on the component selector before entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set the code for a DVD player after pressing DVD MENU on the component selector. The code set in the DVD/LD mode is also simultaneously set in the DVD MENU mode. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. English 45 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 45 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ To return to the factory-set codes in each mode Returning to the Factory Setting ■ To return to the factory-set codes in all modes 1 Press one of the component selector buttons other than AMP(TUNER). 2 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “9990”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. 1 Press one of the component selector buttons which corresponds to the component to be returned to the factory-set code. 2 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. The following codes are factory set. Component selector button Component Code TV CBL/SAT VCR DVD/LD CD TAPE/MD TV Cable TV VCR DVD player CD player MD recorder 0101 0006 0002 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player) 0005 (YAMAHA CD player) 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder) Set component We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above. 46 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 46 3/28/1, 4:50 PM Set code SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INTRODUCTION A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play back various sound fields for the source you are listening to. Note • Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you. Hi-Fi DSP Programs ■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4 No. Program (group) Sub-program Features — 2 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a highenergy, “immediate” sound. 5CH STEREO Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Note CINEMA DSP Programs ■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6 No. Program (group) Sub-program GAME Features 4 ENTERTAINMENT 5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. ADVANCED OPERATION • Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.) BASIC OPERATION CONCERT HALL PREPARATION 1 A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. APPENDIX English 47 0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 47 3/28/1, 4:50 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9 No. 7 Program (group) Sub-program MOVIE THEATER 1 SPECTACLE Input source 70 mm SPECTACLE Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SPECTACLE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SPECTACLE DTS SCI-FI 8 70 mm SCI-FI Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SCI-FI DTS MOVIE THEATER 2 ADVENTURE 70 mm ADVENTURE Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL ADVENTURE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) Features This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. DTS ADVENTURE DTS GENERAL 9 q/DTS SURROUND NORMAL 70 mm GENERAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS GENERAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ Dolby Digital NORMAL (5.1-channel) ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ ENHANCED Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ Dolby Digital ENHANCED (5.1-channel) DTS DIGITAL SUR./ ENHANCED DTS This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. Notes • The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program. • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, no sound is output from the center speaker. • The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5 to 8. 48 0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 48 3/28/1, 4:50 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2 The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. sound field ADVANCED OPERATION When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP) These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-equipped movie theater Presence DSP sound field without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI DGTL ADVENTURE Left surround DSP Right surround DSP DTS ADVENTURE sound field sound field DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL BASIC OPERATION The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. PREPARATION When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the Presence DSP sound field main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. 70 mm SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE Surround DSP 70 mm GENERAL INTRODUCTION Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. APPENDIX English 49 0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 49 3/28/1, 4:50 PM APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound and/or no picture. Cause Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. 18 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when the unit is in the standby mode. 18 The protection circuit has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 16, 17 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 21 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 22 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. 22 Make connections using the same type of jack (between composites, S-VIDEOs, or components) for both the input and output. 14, 15 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. The picture does not appear. Remedy The output and input for the video are connected to different types of video jacks. HTR-5450 only 21 16, 17 — HTR-5450 only The sound suddenly goes off. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 18 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. 16, 17 The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 39 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 22 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 50 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 50 3/28/1, 4:50 PM 12 – 17 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound from the effect speakers. Cause Remedy Press EFFECT to turn it on. 25 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 47, 48 22 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 37 “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 33 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected. Select another DSP program. No sound from the subwoofer. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 9. Select another DSP program. “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 34 “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 34 47, 48 — “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. 34 The output mode for each speaker (main, center or rear) in the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 33, 34 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 ADVANCED OPERATION A “humming” sound can be heard. 37 BASIC OPERATION The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. 47, 48 PREPARATION The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. INTRODUCTION The sound effect is off. A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. HTR-5450 only No sound from the center speaker. Refer to page APPENDIX English 51 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 51 3/28/1, 4:50 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Turn on the power to the component. Refer to page The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The effect and surround sounds cannot be recorded. The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. A source cannot be recorded. An analog source is being input during digital recording. HTR-5450 only Input a digital source. HTR-5450 only A source component and recording component are not digitally connected to the unit. HTR-5450 only Make digital connections. HTR-5450 only A digital source is being input during analog recording. Input an analog source. A source component and recording component are not analog connected to the unit. Make analog connections. The settings of the SET MENU and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “9 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 39 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — 31 It is not possible to record the effect and surround sounds by a recording component. 52 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 52 — 3/28/1, 4:50 PM 12 – 15 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM FM antenna. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 26 Use the manual tuning method. 27 There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. 26 The station is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. 27 26 The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. 28 The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 26 Use the manual tuning method. 27 Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 26 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). ■ Remote control Problem The unit or other component cannot be controlled. Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. 7 The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The component to be controlled has not been selected. Press one of the component selector buttons, corresponding to the component to be controlled. 40 The remote control cannot control system components. The manufacturer code has not been set up properly. — Enter the code again. 45 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Use the original remote control supplied with your component. APPENDIX Depending on the manufacturer or the model, some components cannot be controlled with this unit’s remote control even though the code has been set up properly. ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause — 53 53 3/28/1, 4:50 PM English After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN BASIC OPERATION Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. PREPARATION The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing AM noises. Refer to page INTRODUCTION FM stereo reception is noisy. Remedy SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5450) AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... 80 W [Singapore, China and General models] ................................. 70 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ....................................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Maximum power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 100 W • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ............................. 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ........................................................ 100 W • Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ..................................... 70 dB • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 105/125/145/165 W [China and General models] .............................. 95/115/135/155 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms) ................................................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 ohms) .................................................................................. 0.025% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB • Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Australia and Singapore models] ............................ 531 to 1611 kHz [China and General models] 10 kHz step ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz 9 kHz step .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted) ................................................................................ 100 dB or more • Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz [Singapore model] ................................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz [China model] .......................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Channel Separation CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (1 kHz) .................................................. 60 dB (10 kHz) ................................................ 45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 490 mV/390 ohms • Input Sensitivity CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more • Output Level REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .......................... NTSC [Australia and Singapore models] ............................................... PAL GENERAL • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] ......................................................................... 240 W [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ............................................................................................... 250 W [Canada model] ........................................................... 250 W/320 VA Standby Mode [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 0.90 W [Australia and Singapore models] ........................................ 0.96 W • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 5CH, 10% THD ........................................................................ 500 W • AC Outlets 2 (SWITCHED) [U.S.A., Canada and Singapore models] .... Total 100 W maximum [China and General models] ......................... Total 50 W maximum 1 (SWITCHED) [Australia model] ........................................ Total 100 W maximum • Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm • Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • Weight ....................................................................................... 10.0 kg • S-Video Signal Level Y ............................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C ........................................................................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms • Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control ........................................................................................... Batteries ............................................................................. AM loop antenna .......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ...................................................................... Quick Reference Card ............................................................................ Connection Guide • Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ...................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 54 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 54 3/28/1, 4:50 PM SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5440) FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ...................................... 65 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Maximum power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... 80 W [Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ...................................................................... 75 W • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ......................................................... 95 W • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms .......................................................... 95 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 95/115/135/155 W [China and General models] .............................. 90/110/130/150 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 ohms) .................................................................................. 0.025% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted) ................................................................................ 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 470 mV/390 ohms • Input Sensitivity CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB • Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ..... 531 to 1611 kHz [China and General models] 10 kHz step ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz 9 kHz step .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz [Europe, U.K., and Singapore models] ................... AC 230 V/50 Hz [China model] .......................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] ......................................................................... 200 W [Canada model] .......................................................... 210 W/280 VA [Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore China and General models] ............................................................................................... 210 W Standby Mode [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 0.90 W [Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore and China models] ..... 0.96 W • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 5-ch, 10% THD ........................................................................ 480 W • AC Outlets 2 (SWITCHED) [U.S.A., Canada and Singapore models] .... Total 100 W maximum [China and General models] ......................... Total 50 W maximum 1 (SWITCHED) [Australia model] ........................................ Total 100 W maximum • Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm • Weight ......................................................................................... 9.5 kg • Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control ........................................................................................... Batteries ............................................................................. AM loop antenna .......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ...................................................................... Quick Reference Card ............................................................................ Connection Guide • Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more * Specifications are subject to change without notice. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .......................... NTSC [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ........................ PAL English • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite ...................................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB 55 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 55 APPENDIX • Output Level REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3% ADVANCED OPERATION • Channel Separation CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (1 kHz) .................................................. 60 dB (10 kHz) ................................................ 45 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB BASIC OPERATION • Frequency Response CD, etc. to MAIN L/R .................................. 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±5 dB • Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ..................................... 70 dB PREPARATION • IEC Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 67 W • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ............................. 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION 3/28/1, 4:50 PM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). 56 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 56 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 3/28/1, 4:50 PM GLOSSARY ■ S VIDEO signal HTR-5450 only INTRODUCTION With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) PREPARATION Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits HTR-5450 only BASIC OPERATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) APPENDIX Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s digital jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. English 57 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 57 3/28/1, 4:50 PM INDEX A M AC outlets ...................................................................................... 18 Antennas ........................................................................................ 26 B Manufacturer codes .................................................................... 45, i Memory back-up ............................................................... 28, 33, 38 MEM. GUARD (SET MENU) ...................................................... 36 Muting ........................................................................................... 22 BALANCE .................................................................................... 22 BGV function ................................................................................ 22 P C CBL/SAT mode ............................................................................. 44 CD mode ........................................................................................ 42 CINEMA DSP ......................................................................... 47, 56 Connections Antennas ................................................................................. 26 Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder and CD player) .............................................................................. 12 External decoder ..................................................................... 12 Power supply cords ................................................................ 18 Speakers ................................................................................. 16 Video components (DVD player, VCR and TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ............................. 14 D Delay time ..................................................................................... 37 Display ............................................................................................. 8 DISPLAY SET (SET MENU) ....................................................... 36 DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU) D-RANGE .............................................................................. 35 LFE LEVEL ........................................................................... 35 Dolby Digital ................................................................................. 56 Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ............................................... 56 DSP program CINEMA DSP program .......................................................... 47 Hi-Fi DSP program ................................................................. 47 DTS ............................................................................................... 56 DTS SET (SET MENU) ................................................................ 36 Dust protection cap ........................................................................ 12 DVD/LD mode .............................................................................. 43 DVD MENU mode ........................................................................ 43 Package contents ............................................................................. 3 PCM ............................................................................................... 57 Playing ........................................................................................... 21 Power supply cords ....................................................................... 18 Preset stations Exchanging preset station ....................................................... 30 To recall a preset station ......................................................... 29 Presetting tuning Automatic preset tuning ......................................................... 28 Manual preset tuning .............................................................. 29 R Rear panel ........................................................................................ 9 Recording ...................................................................................... 31 Remote control Basic operation ......................................................................... 6 Batteries .................................................................................... 3 Operation range ........................................................................ 7 Setup codes ............................................................................. 45 S Front panel ....................................................................................... 4 Sampling frequency (HTR-5450 only) .................................... 22, 57 SET MENU ................................................................................... 32 SILENT CINEMA ................................................................... 25, 56 Sleep timer ..................................................................................... 39 SP DLY TIME (SET MENU) ........................................................ 36 Speaker Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) ...................................... 37 Placement ............................................................................... 10 Output balance (test tone) ...................................................... 19 SPEAKER SET (SET MENU) BASS OUT ............................................................................. 34 CENTER SP ........................................................................... 33 MAIN LVL ............................................................................. 34 MAIN SP ................................................................................ 33 REAR LR SP .......................................................................... 33 Subwoofer ..................................................................................... 17 S VIDEO (HTR-5450 only) .......................................................... 57 H T HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) .................................................... 34 TAPE/MD mode ............................................................................ 41 Test tone ........................................................................................ 19 Tuning Automatic tuning .................................................................... 27 Manual tuning ........................................................................ 27 TV mode ........................................................................................ 44 E External decoder ............................................................................ 12 F I IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ............................................... 18 INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ....................................................... 35 Input modes ................................................................................... 23 I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) ..................................................... 34, 57 V L LFE .................................................................................... 35, 36, 56 VCR mode ..................................................................................... 44 Virtual CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 25, 56 58 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 58 3/28/1, 4:50 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT Elin Elta Emerson 1001 0331 0001, 0021, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0091, 0111, 0811, 0821, 0831, 0841, 0851, 0861, 0871, 0901, 0921, 0941, 0981, 1011, 1031, 1051, 1081, 1091 Envision 0361, 1111 Erres 1001 Etron 0331 Ferguson 1001 Finlux 1001 Fisher 0171, 0801, 0981 Formenti 0441 Formonti 1001 Fortress 1141 Fujitsu 1091 Funai 1051, 1091, 1501, 1521 Futuretech 1051 GE 0131, 0161, 0201, 0751, 0761, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0811, 0861, 1041 GEC 0271, 1001 Gemini 0391 Genexxa 0431 Gibralter 0891, 1031, 1111 GoldStar 0031, 0121, 0351, 0411, 0731, 0741, 0861, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 Goodmans/Tashiko 0271, 0661, 1001 Granada 1001 Grundig 1781, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1851, 1861, 1871, 1881 Gunpy 1051, 1091 H/K 0721 Hallmark 0861 Hanseatic 1001 Harvard 1051, 1061 Hinari 1001, 1091 Hitachi 0181, 0351, 0671, 0681, 0691, 0701, 0711, 0871, 0941, 0971, 1351 Hypson 1001 Ima 1051 Indiana 1001 Infinity Reference 0101 Interfunk 1001 ITT 0611 Janeil 1131 JBL 0101 JCB 0951 Jensen 0311 Jinxing 1531, 1541, 1551, 1561, 1571, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1651, 1691, 1731 JVC (Victor) 0261, 0281, 0641, 0651, 0661, 0841 Kawasho 0901 TV A-Mark A Tandy Abex Admira Adventura Aiko Akai Alba Alleron Ambassador Amstrad Anam 1161 0941 1151 1141 1131 1121 0331, 1101, 1111 0431 1091 1081 0481, 1081 0251, 1041, 1051, 1061, 1071 Anam National 1041 AOC 0361, 1021, 1031, 1111, 1161 Archer 1161 Audiosonic 1001 Audiovox 1051, 1161 Aiwa 1481 Bauer 0441 Baur 1001 Beijing 1511, 1551, 1561 Belcor 1031 Bell & Howell 0981, 0991 Beon 1001 Bradford 1051 Brockwood 1031 Broksonic 1161 Bush 1001 Candle 0351, 0361, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1131 Capehart 1021 Carver 0101 Cathay 1001 Celebrity 0951 Centurion 0411 Changhong 1541, 1551, 1561, 1621 Citizen 0351, 0361, 0921, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1121, 1131 Clairtone 1011 Clarivox 1001 Concerto 0351, 0971 Conrowa 1751 Contec 0901, 0911, 1011, 1051 Corando 0941 Craig 0251, 1051 Crown 0941, 1051 Curtis Mathes 0161, 0361, 0931, 0941, 0981, 1111 CXC 1051 Daewoo 0291, 0301, 0331, 0721, 0941, 1001, 1031, 1121, 1191, 1531, 1581, 1591, 1601 Dansai 1001 Daytron 0941, 1031 Decca 0271, 1001 Dixi 0331, 1001, 1071 Dumont 0891, 1031 Dynatech 0881 Electroband 0951, 1011 Electrohome 0941 Electron 0941 Kaypani Kenwood Kloss KTV 1021 0361, 1031, 1111 0631, 0721, 1131 0921, 0941, 1011, 1051, 1111 Leyco 1001 Liesenk & Tter 1001 Lloytron 0941 Loewe 1001 Logik 0991, 1771 Luxman 0351, 0971 Lxi 0101, 0621, 0761, 0861, 0981 Magnavox 0101, 0341, 0391, 0401, 0411, 0421, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0661, 0961, 1111 Majestic 0991 Marantz 0101, 0221, 0361, 1001, 1111 Mark 1001 Matsui 0271, 0331, 1001 Mediator 1001 Megatron 0691, 0861, 1161 MEI 1011 M Electronic 1001 Memorex 0331, 0571, 0861, 0971, 0981, 0991, 1771 Metz 1791, 1831, 1891, 1901, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1941 MGA 0361, 0561, 0571, 0861, 1031, 1111 Midland 0751, 0761, 0891, 0941, 1151 Mitsubishi 0221, 0321, 0561, 0571, 0661, 0861, 1031, 1101, 1381 Montgomery 1091 Motorola 1041, 1141 MTC 0351, 0361, 0881, 0931, 0971, 1011, 1031, 1111 Multitech 0881, 1051 NAD 0551, 0621, 0861 NEC 0241, 0351, 0361, 0661, 0971, 1031, 1111, 1321, 1711 Neckermann 1001 Nei 1001 Nikkai 0271, 0431, 1001, 1151 Nikko 0861, 1111, 1121 Novabeam 0721 NTC 1121 Onwa 1051 Optimus 0551 Optonica 0541, 1(“1 Orion 0831, 1001 Osaki 0271, 1151 Otto Versand 1001 Panasonic 0101, 0191, 0251, 0751, 1041, 1311, 1371, 1431 Panda 1541, 1721 Penny Peony Philco Philips Phonola Pilot Pioneer Portland Priceclub Prism Proscan Protech Proton Pulsar Pulser Quasar Quelle Radio Shack Radiola RCA Realistic Rhapsody R-line Runco Saisho Sampo Samsung Samsux Sanyo SBR Schneider Scimitsu Scotch Scott Sears Shanghai Sharp Shogun Signature 0161, 0361, 0521, 0531, 0621, 0731, 0751, 0761, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0931, 0941, 1031, 1041, 1111, 1151, 1161 1561, 1621 0361, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1031, 1111 0101, 0401, 1001 1001 0941, 1031, 1111 0511, 0551, 0871 0941, 1031, 1121 0931 0751 0761 1001 0501, 0861, 0941, 1021, 1161 0891 1031 0251, 0751, 1041 1001 0541, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1151 1001 0051, 0141, 0151, 0181, 0411, 0491, 0531, 0761, 0771, 0871, 1031 0541, 0861, 0941, 0971, 0981, 1031, 1051, 1111, 1151 1011 1001 0891, 1111 0331, 1081 0361, 0941, 1021, 1111, 1151 0331, 0341, 0351, 0361, 0861, 0931, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 0941 0171, 0231, 0271, 0661, 0801, 0911, 0981, 1231, 1251, 1261 1001 1001 1031 0861 0831, 0861, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1091 0101, 0161, 0171, 0351, 0481, 0521, 0621, 0761, 0801, 0861, 0971, 0981, 1091 1561, 1681 0461, 0471, 0541, 0661, 0911, 0941, 1141 1031 0991, 1771 i 03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 1 3/28/1, 4:54 PM Simpson Solavox Sonoko Sontec Sony 0581, 0961 1151 1001 1001 0371, 0451, 0661, 0841, 0951, 1281, 1441 Soundesign 0861, 0961, 1051, 1091 Soundwave 1001 Spectricon 1161 Squareview 0481 SSS 1031, 1051 Star-lite 1051 Suprem 0951 Supre-macy 1131 Surpa 0351, 0971 Sylvania 0101, 0361, 0441, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1111 Symphonic 0481 Sysline 1001 Tandy 0271, 0431, 1141 Tatung 0271, 0881, 1001, 1041, 1161 Tcl 1561, 1631, 1701 Technics 0751 Techwood 0351, 0751, 0971 Teknika 0101, 0351, 0571, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1051, 1091, 1121, 1131, 1771 Teletech 0331 Tera 0501 Thakral 1671 Thorm 1001 TMK 0351, 0861, 0971, 1081 Toshiba 0381, 0521, 0621, 0661, 0931, 0981, 1301 Tosonic 1011 Totevision 0941 Trical 0911 Universal 0781, 0791 Universum 1001 Vector Research 0361, 1111 Vestel 1001 Video Concept 1101 Vidikron 0101, 0211 Vidtech 0861, 1031 Viking 1131 Wards 0101, 0361, 0451, 0541, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1091, 1111, 1771 Watson 1001 Xogego 1611, 1621, 1661, 1741, 1761 Yamaha 0361, 1031, 1111 Yoko 1001 Zenith 0011, 0041, 0891, 0991, 1771 Zonda 1161 CABLE ABC 0256, 0376 Antronix 0136 Archer 0136, 0286 BBT 0076 Cabletime 0166 Cablevision 0196 Colour Voice 0306, 0346 Comtronics 0216, 0276 Eagle Comronics 0276 Eastern 0066 Electricord 0206 Electus 0266 GE 0116, 0126 GEC Cable System 0196 Hamlin H5 0676 Hamlin H6 0666 Hamlin H6S 0656 Hamlin H8 0646 Hamlin H9 0636 Jerrold 0256 Jerrold 400L 0626 Jerrold 450L 0616 Jerrold 550 0606 Jerrold Osd Catv 0596 Jerrold Sprucer 0436 Magnavox/Philips 0416, 0426 Mamm 0296 Memorex 0386 Movie Time 0146, 0206 Northcoast 0016 NSC 0146 Oak 0106 Oak Sigma 450 0546 Oak Sigma 550 0536 Panasonic TZ 120/130 0476 Panasonic TZ 170/180 0446 Panasonic TZ140 0466 Panasonic TZ150/160 0456 Paragon 0386 Philips 0036, 0216, 0306, 0316, 0326, 0336, 0346 Pioneer 0006, 0086 Pioneer BR50 0846 Pioneer BR60/70/80/81/82 0696 Pioneer BR90 0556 Pulsar 0386 RCA Digital Satellite System 0396, 0406 Realistic 0136 Regency/Eastern 0686 Runco 0386 Samsung 0276 Scientific Atlanta 175/475 0576 Scientific Atlanta 75 0366, 0586 Scientific Atlanta 8650 0566 Signal 0276 SL Marx 0276 Spectavision 0236 Standard Components 0186 Starcom V 0256 Stargate 0276 Sylvania/Texscan 0376, 0496 Teknika 0176 Teleservice 0056 Teleview 0276 Texscan 0186, 0376 TFC 0026 Tocom 0226, 0356 Tocom 5503A 0526 Tocom 5503VIP/5507 0516 Tocom TC56 0506 Toshiba 0386 Tudi 0046 Unika Universal Videoway Viewstar Zenith 0136 0136, 0156, 0206, 0286 0096 0216 0246, 0386, 0486 SATELLITE TUNER Alpha Star 0826 Chaparral 0756 Echostar 0836 General Instrument 0776 HTS 0836 Hughes Network Systems 0816 Jerrold 0776, 0786 Panasonic 0806 Primestar 0776, 0786 RCA 0766 Sony 0796 VCR A Tandy Adventura Aiko Aiwa Akai 0902 0992 0982 0992 0262, 0942, 0952, 0962, 0972 American High 0932 Amstrad 0992 ASA 0002, 0912 Asha 0922 Audio Dynamics 0202 Audiovox 0912 Beaumark 0922 Bell & Howell 0902 Blaupunkt 0412 Broksonic 0872, 0882, 0892 Bush 0852 Calix 0912 Canon 0862, 0932 CCE 0852, 0982 Citizen 0912, 0982 Colt 0852 Craig 0832, 0842, 0852, 0912, 0922 Curtis Mathes 0662, 0822, 0932 Cybernex 0922 Daewoo 0802, 0812, 0982 DBX 0202 Dynatech 0472, 0992 Electrohome 0912 Electrophonic 0912 Emerex 0792 Emerson 0072, 0132, 0142, 0152, 0162, 0172, 0182, 0192, 0212, 0702, 0712, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0752, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0872, 0882, 0892, 0912, 0952, 0992, 1072 Finlux 0002, 0992 Fisher 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902 Fuji 0672, 0932 Funai 0992 Garrard 0992 GE 0662, 0822, 0932 Go Video 0642, 0652 GoldStar 0082, 0632, 0912 Goodmans 0402 Gradiente 0992 Granda 0612, 0902 Grundig 0002 H/K 1082 ii 03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 2 3/28/1, 4:54 PM Harley Davidson 0992 Harmon/Kardon 0632, 1082 Harwood 0752, 0852 Headquarter 0612 HI-Q 0842 Hinari 0852 Hitachi 0102, 0562, 0572, 0582, 0592, 0602, 0992 ITT 0942 JVC (Victor) 0202, 0522, 0532, 0542, 0552 Kenwood 0202, 0542, 0612, 0632, 0902 KLH 0852 Kodak 0912, 0932 Lloyd 0992 Logik 0852 Luxor 0942 LXI 0022, 0912 Magnavox 0002, 0482, 0492, 0502, 0512, 0932 Magnin 0922 Marantz 0002, 0202, 0402, 0632, 0932 Marta 0912 Matsui 0722 Matsushita 0932 MEI 0222, 0932 Memorex 0232, 0242, 0472, 0512, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 MGA 0762, 0952 MGA Technology 0922 Minolta 0592, 0602 Mitsubishi 0452, 0462, 0542, 0762, 0952, 1082 Motorola 0472, 0932 MTC 0922, 0992 Multitech 0852, 0992 NAD 0442 NEC 0122, 0202, 0292, 0422, 0432, 0542, 0632 Nikko 0912 Noblex 0922 Olympus 0412, 0932 Optimus 0442, 0472, 0912 Optonica 0402 Orion 0212, 0722, 0742, 0772 Osaki 0912 Panasonic 0012, 0052, 0092, 0222, 0372, 0382, 0392, 0412, 0932 Penny 0202, 0432, 0602, 0632, 0692, 0912, 0922, 0932 Pentax 0592, 0602 Perdio 0992 Philco 0002, 0932 Philips 0002, 0282, 0402, 0492, 0932 Pilot 0912 Pioneer 0442, 0542 Proscan 1002, 1012, 1022, 1032, 1042, 1052, 1062 Pulsar 0512 Quarter 0612 Quartz 0272, 0612 Quasar 0382, 0392, 0932 Radio Shack 0912, 0992 Radix 0912 Randex 0912 RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Technics Thomson Toshiba Yamaha RCA 0112, 0382, 0392, 0482, 0592, 0602, 0662, 0822, 0942 Realistic 0402, 0472, 0612, 0682, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 Ricoh 0352, 0362 Saisho 0212, 0582, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0772 Salora 0612, 0762 Samsung 0212, 0312, 0922, 0962 Sanky 0472, 0512 Sansui 0292, 0542, 0832 Sanyo 0242, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0922 SBR 0002, 0282 Schneider 0852 Scott 0342, 0712, 0762, 0872, 0882, 0892 Sears 0302, 0592, 0602, 0612, 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0932 Sharp 0402, 0472 Shintom 0852 Shogun 0922 Singer 0852 Sony 0032, 0332, 0352, 0362, 0672, 0792, 0932 STS 0602 Sunpak 0352 Sylvania 0002, 0492, 0502, 0762, 0932, 0992 Symphonic 0992 Tandy 0992 Tashiko 0712, 0992 Teac 0992 Technics 0932 Teknika 0322, 0912, 0932, 0992 Telefunken 0252 TMK 0212, 0732, 0772, 0922 Toshiba 0062, 0302, 0342, 0622, 0682, 0712, 0762 Totevision 0912, 0922 Unitech 0922 Vector Research 0202, 0432, 0632 Video Concepts 0202, 0432, 0632, 0952 Wards 0322, 0402, 0472, 0482, 0602, 0712, 0842, 0852, 0922, 0932, 0992 Yamaha 0202, 0632 Zenith 0042, 0362, 0512, 0672 Zenith LD PLAYER Aiwa Denon Disco Vision Funai Hitachi (E) Kenwood Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi NAD Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Realistic Sharp Sony Victor Yamaha 0157 0147 0017 0157 0017 0087, 0107 0027 0027 0137 0137 0077, 0177 0027 0037, 0017, 0137 0167 0157 0127 0047, 0057, 0117 0097 0007, 0067 CD PLAYER Acoustic Research 1295 ADC 0025, 0065 Adcom 0205, 0255, 1015 ADS 0265 Aiwa 0295, 0945, 1035, 1055 Akai 0175, 0485, 0535 Alpine 1215, 1305 Audio-Technica 0545 BSR 0245, 0655, 0775 California Audio Lab 0055 Capetronic 1205 Carrera 0245 Carver 0285, 1135 Casio 0345 Crown 0185 Curtis Mathes 0345 Denon 0275, 0875, 0885 Deual (E) 0505 Dynamic Bass (H) 0555 Emerson 0205, 0325, 1105 Eroica 1275 Fisher 0095, 0555, 0925, 1005 Garrard 0365 Genexxa 0305, 0325, 1105 GoldStar 1225, 1265, 1135, 1335 H/K 0105, 0175, 0465, 0995 Hitachi 0195, 0505, 0205, 0815 Inkel 0115, 0395 JVC (Victor) 0315 Kenwood 0045, 0095, 0405, 0585, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0755, 0895 Kyocera 0025 Luxman 0075, 0425, 0675, 0705, 0715, 0985 Magnavox 0165, 0215, 0645, 0955 DVD PLAYER Akai Denon Hitachi JVC (Victor) Kenwood Magnavox Mitsubishi Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proscan 0308 0148 0068 0028 0048 0328 0088, 0248 0008, 0048, 0188, 0248 0248 0108 0368 0388 0168, 0348 0288 0248 0268 0128, 0248 0048 0188, 0248 0208, 0228 0308 Marantz 0215, 0235, 0375, 0785, 1345 McIntosh 0355, 1085 MCS 0905, 1315 Memorex 0205, 0225, 0235, 0305, 0325, 1105 MGA 0135 Mission 0215 Mitsubishi 0135, 0445 MTC 1255 NAD 0035, 0615, 0685, 0695 Nakamichi 0125, 0435, 0515 NEC 0255, 0905, 0965 Nikko 0545, 1005 Onkyo 0155, 0455, 0495, 0805, 1155 Optimus 0225, 0245, 0555, 0595, 0845, 0855, 0865, 0895, 0935 Panasonic 0055, 0825, 1095, 1125 Penny 0905 Philips 0165, 0215 Pioneer 0305, 0935, 1045 Proton 0215, 1185 Quasar 0055 RCA 0205, 0915, 1115 Realistic 0205, 0225, 0235, 0325, 0555, 0845 Revox 1175 Rotel 0215 Saba Telecommander (E) 0505 SAE 0215 Samsung 1285 Sansui 0215, 0625, 0975, 1025, 1105 Sanyo 0145, 0555, 0635, 0765 Scott 0325, 1105 Sears 0345 Sharp 0235, 0665, 0895, 1065, 1075 Sherwood 0115, 0235, 0395, 0475 Siements Garrard 1245 Signature 0175 Sontec 1165 Sony 0065, 0565, 0865, 1145 Staron 1235 STS 0025 Sylvania 0215 Symphnoic 0335 Tandy 0305 Tangberg 1195 Teac 0235, 0335, 0385, 0525, 0795, 0835, 1355 Technics 0055, 0605, 1095 Techwood 1325 Telefunken (E) 0505 Thomson (E) 0505 Toshiba 0035, 0685 Vector Research 0065, 1135 Wards 0175 Yamaha 0005, 0015, 0085, 0415, 0545, 0575, 1065 CD-RECORDER/CD-RW Hitachi JVC (Victor) Marantz Philips Pioneer Yamaha 0474 0504 0484, 0494 0444 0454, 0464 0414 MD RECORDER Pioneer Sharp Yamaha 0424 0434 0024, 0394, 0404 TAPE DECK Aiwa Akai Carver Denon Fisher Garrard JVC (Victor) Kenwood Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi Onkyo Optimus Philips Pioneer Revox Sansui Sharp Sherwood Sony Teac Technics Wards Yamaha 0094, 0214, 0224 0184 0094 0304 0144 0194, 0204 0274, 0284, 0294 0124, 0134, 0154, 0234, 0244, 0264 0094 0094, 0344 0184 0364, 0374 0034, 0064, 0204, 0334 0094 0034, 0044, 0064 0354 0094, 0344 0264 0334 0054, 0084, 0324 0194, 0254 0074, 0314 0034 0004, 0014, 0104, 0114, 0164, 0174, 0264 iii 03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 3 4/17/1, 1:50 PM UCA HTR-5450 HTR-5440 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00HTR5450/5440-cv 1 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia ID V723100-2 3/29/1, 11:27 AM Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source) Main speakers A DVD player OPTICAL AUDIO OUT L S VIDEO OUT Main speakers B VIDEO OUT R R OPTICAL OUT S VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L O L R L VIDEO OUT R V S DIGITAL INPUT CD R TUNER AM ANT GND SPEAKERS + — + — L FM ANT A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L DVD CENTER D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT B MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R CENTER REAR R (SURROUND) L S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER + OPTICAL MD/CD-R L — R AUX CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT VCR 1 S V * RX-V520/RX-V520RDS *HTR-5450/HTR-5450RDS only (U.S.A. model) * VIDEO IN L S VIDEO IN Analog signal S Video signal S DIGITAL OUTPUT R V O Video signal Optical signal Signal flow Video Monitor Subwoofer system Center speaker R L Rear speakers V728210 RX-V520/RX-V420 (ML) Quick Reference Card TAPE/MD AMP(TUNER) Input selector buttons Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT EFFECT PRESET–/+ EFFECT EFFECT DISC SKIP–/+ EFFECT DISC SKIP–/+ VOLUME VOLUME TV VOLUME MUTE SLEEP SLEEP TV INPUT PRG+, PRG– REC/PAUSE PLAY DIR A (TAPE) SKIP– (MD) SET MENU REWIND (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) –/+ TIME/LEVEL POWER Input selector buttons Input selector buttons MUTE DVD/LD POWER POWER POWER A/B/C/D/E TEST CD VOLUME TV VOLUME DISPLAY (MD) DECK A/B (TAPE) PAUSE (MD) DIR B (TAPE) SKIP+ (MD) VOLUME TV VOLUME MUTE SLEEP DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE PLAY SKIP– SKIP+ SEARCH FAST FORWARD (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) STOP SEARCH STOP MUTE SLEEP PLAY SKIP– SEARCH TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE SKIP+ SEARCH STOP V728130 V520(Q)_Quick 1 2/1/1, 1:37 PM Quick Reference Card VCR DVD MENU VCR POWER POWER Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP–/+ VOLUME MUTE RETURN MENU SELECT MENU LEFT TITLE CBL/SAT TV VOLUME INDEX TV INPUT MENU UP CBL/SAT POWER MENU DOWN CHANNEL MUTE TV SLEEP *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER VCR REWIND TV SLEEP 2 DISPLAY TV INPUT MENU UP MENU SELECT MENU LEFT VCR STOP CHANNEL TV CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV MUTE TV SLEEP *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE MENU RIGHT VCR FAST FORWARD *1 Press this button twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement. Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in. V520(Q)_Quick TV VOLUME MUTE DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE +100 CHANNEL ENTER CBL/SAT CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV VOLUME MENU RIGHT MENU TV POWER CHANNEL VCR CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV MENU RECALL VCR REWIND MENU DOWN Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. 2/1/1, 1:38 PM VCR FAST FORWARD VCR STOP V728130
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69

Yamaha HTR-5450 Manual de usuario

Categoría
Receptor
Tipo
Manual de usuario
Este manual también es adecuado para